Skip to main content

Full text of "FM 34-2-1 (Reconnisance Surveillance Intelligence)"

See other formats


*FM 34-2-1 
FIELD MANUAL HEADQUARTERS 

NO 34-2-1 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

Washington, DC, 19 June 1991 

TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, AND PROCEDURES FOR 

RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE 

AND INTELLIGENCE SUPPORT TO 

COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE 

Contents 

Page 

Preface iv 

CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION 1-1 

Collection Management Process 1-3 
Solutions to Common Errors in 

Reconnaissance and Surveillance Planning 1-4 

CHAPTER 2 - RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE AND 
INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION 

OF THE BATTLEFIELD 2-1 

Terms 2-1 

Reconnaissance and Surveillance Principles 2-3 
Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield 

Process 2-6 

Reconnaissance and Surveillance Plan 

Development 2-23 

CHAPTER 3 - ASSETS AND EQUIPMENT 3-1 

Assets and Equipment Organic to the 

Maneuver Battalion 3-1 

Assets and Personnel Normally Supporting 

the Maneuver Battalion 3-6 

Assets and Personnel Normally Supporting 

the Maneuver Brigade 3-16 

CHAPTER 4 - PLANNING EFFECTIVE RECONNAISSANCE AND 

SURVEILLANCE 4-1 

Staff Officer Responsibilities 4-3 

Planning 4-4 

CHAPTER 5 - METHODS OF TASKING RECONNAISSANCE AND 

SURVEILLANCE ASSETS 5-1 

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; 
distribution is unlimited. 

*This publication supersedes TC 30-25, 17 July 1977, and 
TC 34-50, 7 January 1980. 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 6 - THE RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE OVERLAY 6-1 



CHAPTER 7 - 



MONITORING THE RECONNAISSANCE AND 

SURVEILLANCE EFFORT 

Tracking Targets and Assets 
Evaluating How Your Assets Report 
Managing Priority Intelligence Requirements 
Modifying the Reconnaissance and 

Surveillance Plan 
Tasking Assets 



CHAPTER 8 - 



CHAPTER 9 - 



AUGMENTING OR TASK ORGANIZING RECONNAISSANCE 
AND SURVEILLANCE MISSIONS 

Task Organized with Engineers and 

Artillery Forward Observers Attached 
to Reconnaissance Patrol 
Task Organized with Signal Assets, 

Observation Posts, and Forward Observers 
Attached To Extended Reconnaissance 
Patrol 
Scouts with Infantry 
D Company, Scout Platoon, and Ground 
Surveillance Radar Effort Augmented 

RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE IN 

OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS 

Detailed Reconnaissance 
Surveillance of the Objective 
Ongoing Reconnaissance and Surveillance 
Planning 

CHAPTER 10 - INTELLIGENCE SUPPORT TO 
COUNTERRECONNAI S S ANCE 
Staff Officers 
Mission Planning 
Reconnaissance Fundamentals 
Using Intelligence Preparation of the 
Battlefield to Support Your 
Counterreconnaissance Effort 
Count erreconna i s sance 



CHAPTER 11 - 



RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE IN 
LOW-INTENSITY CONFLICT 

Factors 

Guerrilla/Insurgent Operations 

Upper Echelon Organization 

Equipment 

Intelligence Preparation of the 
Battlefield Considerations 



7-1 
7-1 
7-2 
7-4 

7-6 
7-8 



8-1 



8-1 



8-2 
8-3 

8-4 



9-1 
9-1 
9-2 

9-3 



10-1 
10-1 
10-3 
10-7 



10-7 
10-11 



11-1 
11-1 
11-3 
11-4 
11-9 

11-24 



ll 



FM 34-2-1 

CHAPTER 12 - ELECTRONIC WARFARE ASSET EMPLOYMENT 12-1 

Fundamentals 12-1 

Planning 12-3 
What Type of Intelligence and Electronic 

Warfare Assets Are Needed? 12-6 

APPENDIX A - Management Tools For Reconnaissance and 

Surveillance Operations A-l 

APPENDIX B - Example of the Reconnaissance and 

Surveillance Process B-l 

Glossary Glossary-1 

References References-1 

Index Index-1 



in 



FM 34-2-1 



Preface 



This field manual provides 
tactics, techniques, and 
procedures (TTP) for 
reconnaissance and surveillance 
(R&S) planning, mission 
management, and reporting. 
It provides TTP for the 
development of intelligence to 
support counterreconnaissance 
(CKj operations. It describes 
employment considerations for 
R&5 assets; and defines the 
roles of the collection manager 
and maneuver brigade and 
battalion S2's in planning 
R&S operations. It describes 
their roles in identifying 
intelligence requirements to 
support CR operations. 

This manual addresses 
TTP for planning and 
conducting R&S and developing 
intelligence to support CR 
operations at maneuver brigade 
and below. It can also apply 
to armored cavalry regiment 
(ACR) and separate brigades. 

This manual is intended 
for maneuver commanders and 
their staffs (especially S2s); 
intelligence staffs and 



collection managers; and other 
personnel involved in planning 
and conducting R&S and 
developing intelligence to 
support CR operations. It is 
intended for use by both active 
and Reserve Components (RC) and 
US Army Training and Doctrine 
Command (TRADOC) schools. 

The doctrine in this 
publication conforms with and 
supports the principles 
contained in FM 34-1. 

Unless this publication 
states otherwise, masculine 
nouns and pronouns do not refer 
exclusively to men. 

The proponent of this 

gublication is the United 
tates Army Intelligence 
Center, Fort Huachuca, AZ. 
Send comments and 
recommendations on DA Form 2028 
(Recommended Changes to 
Publications and Blank Forms) 
directly to Commander, US Army 
Intelligence Center and School, 
ATTN: ATSI-TDL-D, Fort 
Huachuca, AZ 85613-7000. 



IV 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 1 
INTRODUCTION 



Throughout history, 
military leaders have 
recognized the importance of 
R&S. Gaining and maintaining 
contact with the enemy is 
essential to win the battle. 
Our own military history 
contains many examples where 
our knowledge of the enemy, 
or lack of knowledge, directly 
led to victory or defeat. 

The role of R&S has not 
changed on the modern 
battlefield; if anything, 
it has become even more 
important. Battles at the 
combat training centers prove 
that a good R&S effort is 
critical to successful 
attacks. On the other hand, 
a poor R&S effort almost 
guarantees defeat for the 
commander. Figure 1-1 shows 
attack outcome according to 
reconnaissance status (Slue 
Force [BLUFOR]). This chart 
was developed by the Rand 
Corporation in its October 1987 



study, "Applying the National 
Training tenter Experience: 
Tactical Reconnaissance/' 

The message is clear: 
Success on the battlefield 
begins with R&S and R&S begins 
with the intelligence officer. 
As the S2, you play a big role 
in the success or failure of 
your unit. But if being able 
to find the enemy is critical 
to the attack, what role does 
the S2 play in the defense? 

Figure 1-2 shows the attack 
outcome according to reconnais- 
sance status (Opposing Force 
[OPFOR]). This is another 
chart from the same Rand study. 
It clearly shows: If you blind 
the enemy, they will most 
likely fail in the attack. 
Therefore, a successful defense 
depends on finding, targeting, 
destroying, or suppressing 
enemy reconnaissance assets 
before they can report your 
unit's defensive positions. 



RECONNAISSANCE 


STATUS 


BATTLE OUTCOME 


SUCCESS 


FAILURE 


STANDOFF 


Good 
Poor 


13 
50 


9 
4 


1 
38 


3 
8 



Figure 1-1. Attack outcome according to reconnaissance status (BLUFOR). 



RECONNAISSANCE 


STATUS 


BATTLE OUTCOME 


SUCCESS 


FAILURE 


STANDOFF 


Good 
Poor 


28 
5 


26 



1 
5 


1 




Figure 1-2. Attack outcome according to reconnaissance status (OPFOR). 



1-1 



FM 34-2-1 



This implies an aggressive 
CR effort that seeks out enemy 
reconnaissance units rather 
than passively screening. It 
also implies the coordination 
and active participation among 
the S2, S3, fire support 
officer (FSO), and the 
intelligence and electronic 
warfare support element 
(IEWSE). 

This manual describes the 
TTP you can use to develop and 
execute successful R&S pTans. 
Field Manual 34-2 and FM 34-80 
contain additional information 
on collection management and 
R&S. 

This is a "how to" manual. 
It describes how to— 

o Plan R&S operations. 

o Task R&S assets. 

o Graphically depict R&S 
operations. 

o Execute R&S operations. 

o Save time in the planning 
process. 

o Plan for intelligence 
support to CR missions. 

o Plan for division level 
assets, such as signals 
intelligence (SIGINT) 
collectors. 

This manual will show you 
how to succeed in your 
reconnaissance and CR effort, 



giving you and your commander 
the best chance for victory in 
battle. 

The intent is for you to 
use this manual in the field as 
a guide. This manual is also 
designed to show commanders and 
S3s the R&S planning process. 
This manual is arranged 
sequentially to reflect the 
order of the R&S and collection 
management processes. It will 
help you understand R&S a step 
at a time. 

The better prepared you 
are as an S2, the better your 
R&S plan will be. Therefore, 
you snould have a solid 
appreciation for intelligence 
preparation of the battlefield 
(IPB) and its contribution to 
developing an R&S plan. (See 
FM 34-130, Intelligence 
Preparation of the Battlefield, 
for a complete discussion of 
IPB.) You need to know what 
assets are available to you, 
as well as the capabilities 
and limitations of those 
assets. This supports 
planning and executing R&S 
operations. 

Once you formulate your 
plan, you must know how to 
task appropriate assets. One 
way to disseminate the R&S 
plan or taskings is to develop 
an R&S overlay. FM 34-80, 
Appendix E, describes the 
preparation of the R&S 
overlay. As you execute the 
plan, you should know how to 
monitor the R&S effort and 



1-2 



FM 34-2-1 



modify the plan accordingly. 
To reinforce the steps in the 
R&S process, this manual 
includes examples at brigade 
and battalion levels of how to 
plan, prepare, execute, and 
monitor the R&S effort. 

COLLECTION MANAGEMENT PROCESS 

To successfully plan and 
execute the R&S effort, you 
should understand the five 
phases of the collection 
management process, and the 
relationship of R&S to 
collection management. 
Regardless of the echelon, you 
will go through the following 
five steps or phases to develop 
a collection plan and, 
ultimately, an R&S plan: 

o Receive and analyze 
requirements. 

o Determine resource 
availability and capability. 

o Task resources. 

o Evaluate reporting. 

o Update collection 
planning. 

RECEIVE AND ANALYZE 
REQUIREMENTS 

Receiving and analyzing 
requirements means identifying 
what the commander must know 
about the enemy, weather, and 
terrain to accomplish the 
mission. Normally, the 
commander's concerns are 
expressed as questions, termed 
priority intelligence 



requirements (PIR) or 
information requirements (IR). 

PIR and IR are either 
stated by the commander or 
recommended by you and approved 
by the commander. They are the 
very reason R&S plans (and all 
collection plans) exist. You 
may also have requirements from 
higher or subordinate units; 
these you will prioritize and 
consolidate with the 
commander's PIR. Once you have 
identified all requirements, 
you will eventually convert 
them into specific items to 
look for. 

DETERMINE RESOURCE 
AVAILABILITY AND CAPABILITY 

In simplest terms, 
determining resource 
availability and capability 
means assessing what means you 
have to look for the specific 
items you have developed in the 
first step. 

TASK RESOURCES 

When tasking resources, you 
must tell a specific resource 
what it should look for, and 
how it is to report 
information. 

At division and higher, 
several elements accomplish 
these five steps. For example, 
the all-source production 
section (ASPS) aids the 
collection management and 
dissemination ((ZM&D) section in 
analyzing requirements. The 
CM&D may simply task the 
military intelligence (MI) 



1-3 



FM 34-2-1 



battalion to collect on 
specific requirements; the MI 
battalion S2> is the one who 
actually tasks a specific 
asset. In fact, very seldom 
does a division G2 directly 
task a specific asset. 

At maneuver brigade and 
battalion levels, however, your 
S2 section will usually do all 
five steps of the collection 
management process. You will 
develop a collection plan which 
addresses how your unit will 
collect information to satisfy 
all intelligence requirements. 
Unlike division, you will 
normally task specific assets 
to collect specific 
information. 

This essentially is the 
difference between a collection 
plan and an R&S plan: a 
collection plan identifies 
which units or agencies will 
collect information. An R&S 
plan identifies which specific 
assets will be tasked to 
collect information, and how 
they will do it. Therefore, as 
a general rule, R&S planning 
occurs mostly at brigade and 
below. 

EVALUATE REPORTING 

Is the asset accurately 
reporting what it sees based on 
its capabilities? And does the 
report answer the original 
question? 

UPDATE COLLECTION PLANNING 

Do you need more 
information to answer the 



question; or is it time to 
shift focus and begin answering 
another question? 

SOLUTIONS TO COMMON 

ERRORS IN RECONNAISSANCE 

AND SURVEILLANCE PLANNING 

This manual focuses on 
R&S at brigade and battalion 
levels. It discusses ways 
to improve your R&S plans and 
to win the battle. Many 
common mistakes made by S2s 
in the planning stage result 
in unproductive R&d operations. 
These mistakes were noted 
during numerous observations 
at the training centers and 
occur regularly. To avoid 
errors in R&S plans, use 
the guidelines discussed 
below. 

USE IPB PRODUCTS 

Use enemy situation 
templates and event templates 
to identify areas on the 
battlefield where and when 
you expect significant events 
or targets to appear. These 
IPB products will save many 
hours of analysis by 
pinpointing specific areas 
on which to focus your R&S 
effort. 

KNOW YOUR ASSETS 

Know the capabilities and 
limitations of the R&S assets 
available to you. This should 
ensure that assets are not sent 
on missions they are not 
capable of conducting nor 
trained to conduct. 



1-4 



FM 34-2-1 



PROVIDE DETAILS 

When you develop your R&S 
plan, provide details. Generic 
K&S plans do not produce the 
amount of information required 
in the time allocated. 

UNDERSTAND SCHEME 
OF MANEUVER 

It is imperative you 
understand your unit's scheme 
of maneuver before you begin to 
formulate the R&S plan. A well 
thought out R&S plan that does 
not support the scheme of 
maneuver is a useless effort. 

PROVIDE GUIDANCE 

Provide detailed guidance 
to the company and teams as 
they plan their patrol 
missions; patrols also need to 
coordinate with the battalion 
before, during, and after all 
missions. This should preclude 
useless missions and wasted 
lives. You should also make 
sure patrols have enough time 
to plan and execute their 
missions. 

KNOW LOCATIONS OF ASSETS 

You need to continuously 
monitor and disseminate the 
current locations of friendly 
R&S assets. This should 
minimize the incidents of 
fratricide. 

INTEGRATE FIRE SUPPORT 

Involve the FSO in R&S 
planning so that indirect fire 



support is integrated into all 
phases of R&S operations. 

STRESS THE IMPORTANCE 
OF R&S MISSIONS 

Subordinate elements tend 
to ignore collection taskings 
assigned by higher echelons; 
they sometimes consider these 
nonessential taskings. Make 
sure these subordinate element 
commanders understand the 
importance of their R&S 
missions. You must get the S3 
or the commander involved to 
remedy this situation. 

PARTICIPATE IN THE 

DEVELOPMENT OF 

MISSION ESSENTIAL 

TASK LISTS 

The battalion S2 should 
take an active role in the 
development of the scoirL 



itoon battle tasks. [Figure 
l-3l is an example of scoul 
platoon battle tasks. The only 
way to establish a proper 
working relationship to train 
with the scout platoon leader 
in garrison as well as in the 
fiefd. The result will be a 
scout platoon that understands 
what the S2 needs and an S2 
understanding the capabilities 
and limitations of the scout 
platoon. 

POINT OUT NAI 

During CR operations, 
point out areas throughout 
the battlefield where you 
expect enemy reconnaissance. 
Do not limit these NAI to 



1-5 



FM 34-2-1 



just along the forward edge 
of the battle area (FEBA) or 
the line of departure (LD)/ 
line of contact (LC). Company 
and team commanders and staff 
must understand that CR 
operations extend throughout 
the depth of the battlefield. 
Enemy reconnaissance assets 
are trained to look deep and 
to conduct operations well 
into the rear area. 

INCORPORATE FLEXIBILITY 

Be sure to incorporate 
flexibility into your R&S 
plan. Be ready to make 
modifications at any time, 
especially in a nuclear, 
biological, and chemical 
(NBC) environment. The 
Combined Arms in a Nuclear/ 
Chemical Environment (CANE) 
IIB Test explains the 
difficulty in collecting 
intelligence data in an NBC 
environment. 

DO NOT KEEP THE SCOUT 
PLATOON LEADER WAITING 

Do not keep the scout 
platoon leader at the 
tactical operations center 
(TOC) waiting for a complete 
operations order (OPORD). 
Some results are— 

o The scout platoon deploys 
too late to sufficiently 
reconnoiter its assigned NAT 



o Lack of time makes the 
scout platoon leader reluctant 
to exercise the initiative and 
flexibility necessary to ensure 
complete coverage. For 
example, scouts remain in 
their vehicles instead of 
dismounting. 

o The scout platoon fails 
to follow standing operating 
procedures (SOPS). 

DO NOT OVERLY RELY ON 
THE SCOUT PLATOON 

Commanders tend to rely too 
much on their scout platoons. 
An untrained scout platoon may 
display weaknesses in land 
navigation, selecting proper 
R&S positions, reporting 
information, and calling for 
indirect fire. When you do use 
scout platoons, try to confirm 
their reports with information 

athered from other assets. 

lso, do not fall into the trap 
of using the scout platoon as 
the only R&S collection asset. 
When using the scout platoon, 
be sure the mission you give 
them is one they are capable of 
successfully completing. 

These solutions apply to 
common problems occurring 
throughout the Army. Talce note 
of these solutions and try to 
develop R&S plans reflecting 
the solutions, not the 
problems. 



1-6 



FM 34-2-1 



BATTLE TASKS 

1. Evaluate mission, formulate plans. 

2. Maneuver. 

3. Conduct reconnaissance operations. 

4. Conduct security operations. 

5. Conduct mobility and countermobility operations. 

6. Operate in an NBC environment. 

7. Conduct air defense measures. 

8. Perform intelligence operations. 

9. Perform combat support operations. 
10. Sustain readiness. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

1. Platoon battle task: Evaluate mission, formulate plans. 



Critical Tasks: 

a) Produce a platoon fire plan. 

b) Perform precombat checks. 

c) Perform tactical planning. 

d) Employ command and control measures. 

e) Employ OPSEC. 

2. Platoon battle task: Maneuver. 

Critical Tasks: 

a) Perform a tactical road march. 

b) Occupy an assembly area. 

c) Perform a passage of lines. 

d) Conduct tactical movement. 

e) Conduct a relief in place. 

f) Assist in a passage of lines. 



-"V V Y< V 

Figure 1-3. Example of a scout platoon battle tasks list. 



1-7 



FM 34-2-1 

-^v— v ^ i\, 

g) Execute actions on contact, 

h) Support a hasty attack, 

i) Conduct air assault operations, 

j) conduct a hasty river crossing, 

3. Platoon battle task: Conduct reconnaissance operations. 

Critical Tasks: 

a) Perform a route reconnaissance. 

b) Perform a zone reconnaissance. 

c) Perform an area reconnaissance. 

d) Reconnoiter an obstacle and a bypass. 

e) Execute a dismounted reconnaissance patrol. 

4. Platoon battle task: Conduct security operations. 

Critical Tasks: 

a) Screen a stationary force. 

b) Screen a moving force. 

c) Conduct dismounted security patrols. 

5. Platoon battle task: Conduct mobility and countermobility 
operations. 

Critical Tasks: 

a) Emplace and retrieve a hasty protective minefield. 

b) Perform demolition guard force operations. 

6. Platoon battle task: Operate in an NBC environment. 

Critical Tasks: 

a) Prepare for a nuclear attack. 

b) Respond to the initial effects of a nuclear attack. 

c) Respond to the residual effects of a nuclear attack, 
dj Prepare for a chemical attack. 

e) Respond to a chemical agent attack. 

f) Perform chemical decontamination. 

g) Cross a chemically contaminated area, 
h) Cross a radiologically contaminated area. 

7. Platoon battle task: Conduct air defense measures. 



—V V Vn ^ 

Figure 1-3. Example of a scout platoon battle tasks list (continued). 

1-8 



FM 34-2-1 

"v v \a " 



Critical Tasks: 

a) Use passive air defense measures. 

b) Take active air defense measures against hostile aircraft. 

8. Platoon battle task: Perform intelligence operations. 

Critical Tasks: 

a) Process EPWs. 

b) Process captured documents and equipment. 

9. Platoon battle task: Perform combat support operations, 

Critical Tasks: 

a) Perform resupply operations. 

b) Prepare and evacuate casualties. 

c) Perform platoon maintenance operations. 

d) Perform field sanitation operations. 

10. Platoon battle task: Sustain readiness. 

Critical Tasks: 

a) Conduct physical training. 

b) Conduct small arms and crew-served PMI and qualification. 

c) Perform PMCS on vehicles and equipment. 

d) Maintain property accountability. 

e) Conduct battle tasks 5 to 10. 

f ) Counsel soldiers . 

g) Update soldiers records. 



Figure 1-3. Example of a scout platoon battle tasks list (continued). 



1-9 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 2 

RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE AND INTELLIGENCE 
PREPARATION OF THE BATTLEFIELD 



Think of developing an R&S 
plan as being similar to 
building a house. A good house 
needs a solid foundation. The 
miliars for the foundation of 
^&S are the actual terms used. 
3efore going on, let us discuss 
some important terms. 

TERMS 



lossary for 



Refer to the 
the definitions oH 
reconnaissance, surveillance, 
and CR. Below is a discussion 
of these terms. 

RECONNAISSANCE 

Reconnaissance is concerned 
with three components: enemy, 
weather, and terrain. You 
should understand that 
reconnaissance is active; it 
seeks out enemy positions, 
obstacles, and routes. Since 
movement draws attention, good 
reconnaissance uses stealth to 
avoid detection. 

SURVEILLANCE 

Surveillance is passive. 
Surveillance implies observing 
a specified area or areas 
systematically from a fixed, 
concealed position. A good R&S 
plan contains the best mix of 
fc&S based on requirements, 
assets available, and the 
threat. 



COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE 

Essentially, CR means 
blinding the enemy's eyes so 
they cannot detect our attack, 
or cannot locate our defensive 
positions. CR missions require 
you to— 

o Know something about how 
the enemy reconnoiters. 

o Be able to locate, 
target, destroy, or suppress 
enemy reconnaissance assets. 

Providing support to the 
CR mission means that you 
must become an expert on 
threat reconnaissance doctrine, 
tactics, unit organizations, 
and equipment. You must know 
how the enemy plans to collect 
information; when they do it; 
and with what equipment, 
vehicles, and organizations 
they collect. 

Then plan how to find 
the enemy's reconnaissance 
assets before they are able 
to find friendly forces. You 
also need to understand US 
maneuver organizations, 
doctrine, tactics, and 
capabilities, since you may 
be called on to provide a 
recommendation for organizing 
CR forces. 



2-1 



FM 34-2-1 



Coordinate closely with the 
S3 and the FSO, since much of 
their planning relies on your 
ability to predict, locate, and 
confirm enemy reconnaissance 
assets. Your knowledge of 
threat reconnaissance 
capabilities, limitations, and 
vulnerabilities aids the staff 
in developing high payoff 
targets (HPTs). It aids in 
determining how best to destroy 
or suppress those targets, 
either oy lethal or nonlethal 
means. 

At brigade level, you must 
get the IEWSE officer involved 
in CR battle planning, because 
using EW may be crucial to the 
success of the mission. 

Defining R&S and CR in 
isolation may suggest they 
occur in a vacuum. Nothing 
could be further from the 
truth. R&S is a crucial phase 
of the intelligence cycle. As 
you will see, your R&S effort 
requires direction if it is to 
provide the necessary 
intelligence the commander 
needs to fight and win the 
battle. 

You might have the 
impression K&S has definitive 
start and end points. 
Actually, R&S is part of a 
larger, continuing collection 
process. That process gets its 
direction from two things: 
first, the mission; and second, 
by extension, the IPB process. 



These two things tell you— 
o What to collect, 
o Where to collect, 
o When to collect. 



you 



o Who should collect it for 



o Why you must collect it. 



Your collection plan 
enables you to direct and 
control the collection of 
information. That information, 
once recorded, evaluated, and 
interpreted, becomes 
intelligence. Collecting 
information gives commanders 
targeting data so they can 
destroy enemy weapon systems 
and units. Your analysis can 
provide insight into the enemy 
situation to the extent that 
you can make an educated 
estimate of possible future 
enemy courses of action 
(COAs). At this point, inform 
your commander and the rest of 
the staff; then begin to 
develop friendly COAs for 
future operations. 

The cycle continues 
endlessly. However, within the 
cycle you may discover, based 
on the picture you have 
developed, that you must modify 
the collection plan. Or, based 
on what you have collected, you 
must update the IPB terrain 
data base. 



2-2 



FM 34-2-1 



There is an interrelation- 
ship between all aspects of the 
intelligence cycle. Your 
collection plan has a direct 
effect on how you— 

o Process information and 
disseminate intelligence during 
the present battle. 

o Direct your intelligence 
efforts for future battles. 

The R&S plan marries the 
IPB with assets available for 
information collection. It 
organizes and prioritizes 
information requirements. This 
results in R&S taskings to 
units through the S3. 

RECONNAISSANCE AND 
SURVEILLANCE PRINCIPLES 

Now that we have defined 
the terms, let us discuss the 
two principles of R&S. They 
are-- 

o Tell commanders what they 
need to know in time for them 
to act. 

o Do as much as possible 
ahead of time. 

TELL COMMANDERS WHAT 

THEY NEED TO KNOW 

IN TIME FOR THEM TO ACT 

This principle is of 
paramount importance. You must 
develop the K&S plan so that it 
directly addresses what the 
commander wants to know. In 
essence, the R&S effort (as 
with the intelligence effort in 



general) is commander-oriented 
and commander-directed. 
Therefore, you cannot develop 
a successful R&S plan until you 
know exactly what the commander 
needs to know. 

The commander's questions 
which positively must be 
answered in order to accomplish 
the mission are PIR. They are 
the start point for the R&S 
plan. The clearer and more 
precise the commander's PIR, 
the better you will be able to 
develop the R&S plan to answer 
them. 

How do PIR come about? As 
part of the mission analysis 
process, you and your commander 
study the mission given to you 
by higher headquarters. You 
develop specified, implied, and 
essential tasks. Asyou do 
this, you should also be able 
to identify gaps in your 
understanding of the 
battlefield situation. 

The following are examples 
of possible gaps: 

o Which avenue of approach 
(AA) will the enemy use, and 
when? 

o Which fixed- and 
rotary-wing air AAs will the 
enemy use? 

o How will the enemy deploy 
in their attack? 

o Where will the enemy 
commit their second echelon 
forces? 



2-3 



FM 34-2-1 



o What are the enemy 
reconnaissance forces, tactics, 
and capabilities? 

o Where is the enemy main 
supply route (MSR)? 

o Under what circumstances 
will the enemy use NBC 
weapons? How will they be 
employed? 

o What are the enemy 
subsequent and fallback 
positions, and routes from 
their main defensive positions 
to the fallback positions? 

o In what strength will the 
enemy counterattack, and where 
are the armor counterattack 
forces? 

o Where are the enemy 
observation posts (OPs) and 
listening posts (LPs)? 

o Where are the enemy 
antitank (AT) helicopters? 

o Where are the enemy TOCs 
and tactical command posts, 
relays, and communications 
sites? 

o Where are the enemy 
logistic and support areas? 

o What effects of weather 
provide a key advantage or 
disadvantage to you or the 
enemy? 

o Where are the enemy 
obstacles and fire sacks? 

o Where are the enemy main 
defensive positions? 



o Where and when will the 
enemy counterattack, and how 
will they counterattack? 

o Where are the enemy AT 
weapons? 

o Where is the enemy 
artillery? 

Essentially, you and your 
commander try to zero in on 
exactly what will determine the 
outcome of the battle. Many 
times, the commander will tell 
you what is of the most 
concern. It is the 
responsibility of the commander 
to state PIK. However, the S2 
and the S3 can assist in this 
process by presenting their own 
analyses of the mission. 

Remember, PIR drive your 
R&S efforts; so it is critical 
that you understand just 
exactly what your commander 
needs to know in order to 
fight. 

Try to keep the commander's 
PIR as specific as possible. 
The more general the question, 
the harder it is to answer. 
Instead of asking, "With what 
force will the 34th Motorized 
Rifle Regiment attack?", try to 
discern exactly what it is your 
commander is looking for. If 
the commander wants to know how 
the 34th will initially deploy, 
it is better to ask, '"Will the 
34th attack in column, with two 
battalions leading, or with 
three battalions on line?" 

Similarly, is the commander 
concerned with finding the 



2-4 



FM 34-2-1 



enemy's main defensive area; 
or is he really worried about 
locating company and platoon 
positions within the main 
defensive area? How you 
phrase the PIR has a direct 
bearing on how you answer 
those PIR. 

To better focus R&S 
efforts, keep PIR down to a 
manageable number. Normally, 
you will only be able to 
concentrate on three or four 
at any one time. Of course, 
the mission and the 
commander's needs may sometimes 
dictate more. Having a large 
number of priorities defeats 
the purpose of having PIR in 
the first place. 

Other questions the 
commander may have regarding 
the enemy, weather, and terrain 
of a lesser priority than PIR 
are called IK. Examples of IR 
are-- 

o Where or what is the 
enemy's immediate objective? 

o Will the enemy employ 
smoke? 

o Where are the usable 
river fording points? 

Answers to these questions 
may not be critical to the 
immediate success of the 
mission, but they will 
certainly help provide answers 
to those critical questions. 
Keep in mind that IR may at 
some point become PIR, and vice 
versa, depending on the 
situation. 



Once developed, PIR should 
be disseminated to subordinate, 
adjacent, and higher units. In 
this way, you inform everyone 
of the questions you need 
answered. Remember, although 
you may not be able to answer 
a specific PIR at your level, 
your higher headquarters may 
be able to. Disseminating 
your PIR also tells everyone 
what you are most interested 
in. 

Use the intelligence annex 
and intelligence summaries to 
disseminate PIR. Your PIR and 
IR also determine your request 
for intelligence information 
(RII) . The RII is the best way 
to let your higher headquarters 
know your information needs. 
Your higher headquarters does 
not always know what specific 
information you may need. 

Your commanders PIR give 
you a direction in which to 
start your R&S planning. 
Subsequently, most of your 
time will be spent doing 
detailed planning and analysis, 
all focused on answering 
those PIR. Essentially, you 
will study the effects or 
enemy, weather, and terrain 
on the battlefield and the 
mission. 

The best way to study the 
enemy, weather, and terrain is 
through the IPB process. IPB-- 

o Enables you to focus 
analytical efforts on a 
specific part of the 
battlefield. 



2-5 



FM 34-2-1 



o Gives you a way to 
systematically examine the 
terrain and weather effects on 
enemy and friendly actions. 

o Helps you determine the 
effects on R&S activities. 

o Gives you an in-depth 
view of how the enemy fight, 
how they reconnoiter, and where 
they may be most vulnerable. 

Most importantly, IPB gives 
you a way to synchronize your 
K&S plan with the gener^r 



battle plan. JFigure 2-1 
illustrates the commander's 
decision-making process 
(supported by IPB). If it is 
done right, IPB is people- 
intensive and time-consuming. 
This brings us to a second 
principle of R&S. 

DO AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE 
AHEAD OF TIME 

The first four functions of 
the IPB process are homework 
functions. That means you 
build a data base on terrain 
and weather conditions, and 
enemy order of battle (OB) 
before hostilities. For 
example, your unit has received 
a new contingency mission for 
some part of the world. Given 
this mission, begin collecting 
information on terrain features 
and conditions for the area 
your unit is responsible for. 
You might get this information 
from existing maps, area 
studies, or special engineer 
products. Then build a data 
base on the people, customs, 
culture, and other demographics 
of the region. 



Also, collect information 
on historic weather patterns 
and conditions for your area. 
Develop a data base that 
includes how the weather 
influences the terrain and 
the people of that region. 

Finally, learn as much as 
you can about the potential 
threat in that region. 
Depending on how much time you 
had and now much information 
were available, you would— 

o Find out individual unit 
identifications, unit 
organization, and garrison 
locations. 

o Determine the status of 
unit training and overall 
combat readiness. 

o Study threat tactics, 
both doctrinally and 
historically. 

o Build a data base 
containing all this 
information. 

o Update your data base as 
more recent information becomes 
available. (Don't forget to 
ask higher headquarters for 
data base information already 
obtained.) 

INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION OF 
THE BATTLEFIELD PROCESS 

The majority of the IPB 
process needs to be done ahead 
of time. You simply will not 
have time during combat to 
establish any data base or to 
perform an in-depth analysis of 
the enemy, weather, or 



2-6 























FM 34-2-1 




MISSION RECEIVED 






STAFF ACTIONS 


i 


A 


COMMANDER'S ACTIONS 






PROVIDES 

INFORMATION TO COMMANDER 

(STAFF SITUATION UPDATE) 




PROVIDES 
INFORMATION TO STAFF 




^ w 
















• MISSION ANALYSIS 

• RESTATED MISSION 

• COMMANDER'S PLANNING 
GUIDANCE 

• COMMANDER'S INTENT 

• INITIAL PIR 


<— ! 


s 

T 
A 
F 
F 

,-> 
| E 
! S 
i T 
i 1 
! M 
! A 
i T 
| E 




G2 OR S2 BRIEFS CURRENT 

ENEMY SITUATION, 

TEMPLATES, AND COAs 




C 1 
ON 




1 






STAFF WAR GAMES POTENTIAL 
COAS 




MV 
MO 

A 1 










+ 




A L 
NV 
DE 
E M 
RE 
N 
T 






PRESENTS MOST LIKELY COAs 






1 






PRESENTS DST 
(MOST LIKELY COAs) 




\ n 


T 






^T 


• COMMANDER'S WAR GAMING 
(UPDATES PIR) 

• COMMANDER'S DECISION 

• COMMANDER'S CONCEPT 


<«J 






\ 




PREPARATION OF PLANS OR 

ORDERS (INCLUDES FINAL 

VERSION OF DST) 


*^ 






^^\. 


1 






ISSUANCE OF PLANS OR ORDERS 

(INCLUDES FORWARDING DST TO 

SUBORDINATE OR FUNCTIONAL 

CDRS WHEN REQUIRED) 


^^"^^ 




\ / 


APPROVAL OF PLANS OR ORDERS 


. | 


\. J 












\ * 










FEEDBACK 




'sUPERVISIOh 




FEEDBACK 


i ! 






LEGE 


ND: 






1 












— Informal guidance flowing down. 


MISSION ACCOMPLISHED 





























Figure 2-1. Commander's decision-making process (supported by IPB). 



2-7 



FM 34-2-1 



terrain. To successfully plan 
and execute the R&S operation, 
you must have this detailed 
analysis. The IPB process has 
five components: 

o Battlefield area 
evaluation (BAE). 

o Terrain analysis. 

o Weather analysis. 

o Threat evaluation. 

o Threat integration. 

Refer to FM 34-130, 
Intelligence Preparation of the 
Battlefield, for detailed 
information on IPB. 

BATTLEFIELD AREA EVALUATION 

BAE is the first step of 
the IPB process. Begin your 
analysis oy figuring out what 

gart of the battlefield should 
e of interest to you and your 
commander. The end result of 
this step is the identification 
of the area of interest (AI): 
That part of the battlefield 
which contains significant 
terrain features or enemy units 
and weapon systems that may 
affect your unit's near or 
future battle. 

BAE is a crucial step in 
the IPB process because it 
focuses your analytical efforts 
on a finite piece of the 
battlefield. By extension, it 
will also provide geographic 
limits to your R&S ana 
collection efforts. 



The commander bases the 
unit's AI on many things. It 
is normally an expansion of 
your unit's area of operations 
(AO). It should be large 
enough to provide answers to 
the commander's PIR; yet small 
enough to prevent your 
analytical efforts from 
becoming unfocused. 
Determining the AI depends on 
the unit mission and threat 
capabilities. For example, if 
your unit is to attack, your AI 
should extend across your LD/LC 
up to and surrounding your 
intermediate and subsequent 
objectives. 

If the mission is to 
defend, the AI should extend 
far enough to include any 
possible units that might 
reinforce against you. You can 
base your AI considerations in 
terms of time and on how fast 
on or thp pnpmy moves. 



¥ 



igure 2-2| lists general 
distance guidelines in hours 
and kilometers; use this to 
determine your unit's AI. 

Considerations for your AI 
should be expressed in terms of 
distance, based on— 

oHow your unit attacks. 

o How the enemy attacks. 

o What your commander needs 
to know. 

For example, a battalion 
commander fighting an attacking 
enemy using Soviet tactics is 
normally interested in 1st- and 



2-8 



2nd-echelon battalions of 
lst-echelon regiments. 

Doctrinally, these units 
would normally be from 1 to 15 
kilometers from our FLOT. 
Therefore, the AI should extend 
forward at least 15 kilometers. 

You must determine your AI 
during mission analysis. Your 
commander and S3 play a big 

?art in formulating the AI. 
hey tell you what their 
intelligence concerns are. 
Like PIR, your unit's AI must 
be the commander s and must be 
.sent to higher heajdquarters. 
Figures 2-3 and |2-4| snow 
examples of AIs tor defensive 
and offens ive missions. 
Figure 2-5 shows both defensive 
ana offensive. It will help in 
determining your unit's AI. 

TERRAIN ANALYSIS AND 
WEATHER ANALYSIS 

The next two steps in the 
IPB process are terrain and 



FM 34-2-1 

weather analyses. Essentially, 
these are detailed studies of 
how the terrain and weather 
will affect both friendly and 
enemy operations. 
Specifically, terrain and 
weather will dictate how 
effective R&S assets will be, 
and where they should go to 
be most effective. Your 
knowledge of terrain and 
weather will allow you to 
anticipate effects on friendly 
and enemy R&S systems and 
operations. 

Terrain analysis and 
weather analysis should 
start as soon as you have 
determined your AI. Do not 
wait until you deploy to 
start your analysis! The 
more prepared you are, the 
better the R&S aLajl will be. 



Figures 2-6| and [2-7| show 
specific uses and effects 
for terrain and weather 
analyses. 



COMMAND ECHELON 


AREA OF INTEREST 


Hours 


Kilometers 


Battalion 


Up to 12 


Up to 15 


Brigade 


Up to 24 


Up to 30 


Division 


Up to 72 


Up to 100 





Figure 2-2. General distance guidelines. 



2-9 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 2-3. Area of interest in the defense. 




"X 



LOA 



1ST BDE AREA OF INTEREST 





2-10 



Figure 2-4. Area of interest in the offense. 



FM 34-2-1 



DEFENSE 



ECHELON TIME 



DISTANCE 



WHAT YOU WILL SEE 



Bn 



Up to 

12 

hours 



15 km 

Flanks: 3 to 6 

either side 



Forward: out to enemy first 
and second echelon bn of 
first echelon regts. 
km -Regimental artillery 

-Regimental air defense 
-Div or regimental recon 
-Tank bn (-) (MRR) 



Bde 



Up to 

24 

hours 



Forward: 
30 km 



out to 



Flanks: 6 to 10 km 
either side 



Enemy first and second 
echelon regt of first echelon 
div 

-Div artillery -ITB 
-Div ADA -tank regt 
-SSMs fQF MRDs) 



Div 



Up to 

72 

hours 



Forward : 
100 km 



out to 



Flanks: 2 to 

30 km either side 

Rear: out to 

30 km 



Enemy first and second 
echelon div of first echelon 
armies 

-Div, Army, or front arty 
-Div or Army ADA -SSMs 
-Div, Army, or front avn 
-Follow-on div 
-Div or Army CP -OMG 



Bn 



OFFENSE 



Up to Forward: out to 
12 subsequent 
hours obj ective 

Flanks: out to 
3 to 6 km of 
axis or zone 



Security echelon or first 
echelon bn in main defensive 
area 

-Div or regt recon 

-Pit or co strong points 

-AT systems or pit 

-Tank bn (-) (MRR) 



Bde 



Up to Forward: out to 
24 subsequent 
hours obj ective 

Flanks: out to 
6 to 10 km of 
axis or zone 



First and second echelon bn 
of main defensive area 

-Co/bn strong points/ fire 

sacks 
-AT battery 

-Tank regt or ITB (MRD) 
-AT bn 



Up to Forward: out to 
72 subsequent 
hours obj ective 
Div Flanks: out to 

25 to 30 km of 
axis or zone 

Rear: out to 30 km 



First and second echelon regt 
in Army main defensive area 
-Tank regt or ITB (MRD) 
-Div, Army, or front arty 
-ITR or tank div of Army 

Second defensive echelon 
-SSMs 
-Div or Army avn 



Figure 2-5. Defensive and offensive areas of interest. 



2-11 



FM 34-2-1 



TERRAIN FACTOR 



R&S APPLICATION 



Observation 



Ensuring LOS for GSRs 
Emplacement of OPs/LPs and NODs 
Ensuring radio LOS for comm with R&S assets 
Templating enemy R&S asset locations 
Templating enemy smoke and obscurant 
employment 



Field of Fire 



Templating enemy defensive positions 
Templating possible enemy obstacle 

locations 
Coordinating friendly supporting fires 

for patrols and other R&S assets 



Concealment 
and cover 



Ensuring routes for friendly patrols 

and scouts 
Emplacement of REMBASS sensor strings 
Emplacement of LPs, OPs, and GSRs 
Templating enemy patrols 
Templating enemy obstacles 



Obstacles 



Ensuring routes for friendly patrols 

and scouts 
Emplacement of REMBASS sensor strings 
Emplacement of LPs, OPs, and GSRs 
Templating enemy patrols 
Templating enemy obstacles 



Key terrain 



Emplacement of LPs, OPs, GSRs, NODs, 

and REMBASS 
Ensuring routes for friendly patrols 

or scouts 
Templating enemy patrols, recon, or 

obstacles 
Templating enemy movement or defensive 

positions 



AAs 



Emplacement of OPs, LPs, GSRs, NODs, 

and REMBASS 
Templating enemy movement or defensive 

positions 
Templating enemy recon effort 



Figure 2-6. Special uses and effects of terrain. 



2-12 



FM 34-2-1 



ENVIRON- 
MENTAL 
EFFECTS 


PVS5 


PVS2 


DRAGON 
PVS4 THERMAL 


TVS2/5 


TVS4 


TOW THERMAL 
PAS7/UAS11 


GSR 


REMBASS 


Reduced 
visibility 
(in meters) 
(darkness, 
smoke and fog) 


MLT 
200 


MLT 
400 


MLT 
600 


MLT 
1,000 


MLT 
1,200 


MLT 
2,000 


MLT 
3,200 


No 
EFX 


No 
EFX 


Surface winds 
(in knots) 


No 
EFX 


No 
EFX 


No 
EFX 


No 
EFX 


No 
EFX 


No 
EFX 


No 
EFX 


SGT 

20 

MGT 

7 


SGT 

45 
MGT 

15 


Temperature 
(in fahrenheit) 


SGT 
125 

MLT 
32 


SGT 
125 


SGT 
125 

MLT 
-20 


No 
EFX 


SGT 
125 

MLT (5) 
-20 


SGT 
125 


SLT (PAS7) 
-25 

MLT(UAS11) 
20 


No 
EFX 


No 
EFX 


Precipitation 


All sensors are severely degraded by heavy rain or snow. 


LEGEND: S = Severe degradation M = Moderate degradation LT = Less than GT = Greater than 
EFX = Effects 



Figure 2-7. Effects of environment on R&S. 



THREAT EVALUATION 

Once you have analyzed 
terrain and weather, begin a 
thorough study of enemy— 

o Composition. 

o Disposition. 

o Tactics. 

o Training. 

o Combat readiness. 

o Logistic support. 



o Electronic technical 



o Personalities. 

o Other miscellaneous 
factors. 

This study results in 
threat evaluation, the fourth 
step in the IPB process. 
During this step— 

o Develop a doctrinal 
template file. 

o Build up your threat data 
base. 

o Evaluate threat 
capabilities. 



data. 



2-13 



FM 34-2-1 



Doctrinal templates are 
important because they show how 
the enemy doctrinally attacks 
or defends in various 
situations. Knowing how the 
enemy defends will tell you 
what you ought to look for in 
order to confirm that they are, 
in fact, defending. 

Knowing how the enemy 
employs reconnaissance in the 
attack will help you target 
them, allowing you to destroy 
or neutralize those assets. It 
also helps you determine which 
of those assets are most 
important to the enemy's 
reconnaissance effort. 



Figures 2-8 and 2-9 



l 4 

Hi 



are 



examples of doctrinal templates 
you might use specifically for 
R&S planning. Whenever you use 
doctrinal templates, you must 
temper them with some reality. 
For example: a Soviet 
regimental attack template has 
set doctrinal sector widths. 
It serves no purpose to place 
this over a map where a 
battalion falls outside an AA. 
There is enough leeway even in 
Soviet doctrine to conform to 
terrain limitations; when using 
the template you must make 
those same allowances. 

A careful study of threat 
doctrine tells how fast they 
will attack in various 
situations. This information 
will become very important 
later on. For right now, 
remember during threat 
evaluation that you determine 

enemy doctrinal rates of 

advance. 



Figure 2-10 



is a 



table of enemy rates of advance 
for specific situations and 
terrain. 

Finally, knowing how the 
threat uses weapon systems and 
units gives you an appreciation 
of which are most important to 
the enemy commander in a 
particular situation. These 
important weapon systems and 
units are called high value 
targets (HVTs). They are the 
starting point for the target 
value analysis process. Target 
acquisition is an important 
aspect of R&S and CR. Target 
value analysis will play a big 
role in your R&S planning. 

THREAT INTEGRATION 

Remember, the four IPB 
steps should be started before 
deployment. They ought to be 
part of your day-by-day 
intelligence operations. You 
are now at the point where you 
can pull together what you nave 
developed about the enemy, 
weather, and terrain and apply 
it to a specific battlefield 
situation. 

This step is threat 
integration. You will discover 
you can also perform some 
threat integration functions 
ahead of time. The first such 
function is to develop a series 
of situation templates 
depicting how you think the 
enemy will deploy assets. 

Situation Template 

The situation template 
takes what is on the doctrinal 



2-14 



FM 34-2-1 




LEGEND: 



<1 I APC /_\ Platoon observation post iqqqi Mixed minefield 

< / Nv > Tank 7\ Company observation post ^^Hl^/ Defensive position 



Figure 2-8. Doctrinal template of an MRC (reinforced) strong point. 



2-15 



FM 34-2-1 



LU 



CO 

z 
o 

I 

0. 



o 

s 

s 

DC 
O 

LL 

< 



2 

s 
o 
o 



o 




HSH 

8 





— *<D 





^K3! 




Figure 2-9. Offensive doctrinal template. 



2-16 













FM 


34-2-1 


RATES OF MARCH 

UNOPPOSED TACTICAL THREAT RATES OF MARCH 
Unpaved road or trail 20 to 30 km/h 1 km/h 2 min 

Cross country 5 to 1 5 km/h 1 km/h 4 min 

Paved roads 30 to 40 km/h 6 km/h 10 min 

Assault 11 to 22 Km/h 1 km/h 3 min 


RATES OF MOVEMENT (km/h) 


PREPARED DEFENSE 


HASTY DEFENSE 


RATIO 
THREAT: OPPOSITION 


GO 


SLOW 
GO 


NO 
GO 


GO 


SLOW 
GO 


NO 
GO 


Intense resistance 
1 :1 


.6 


.5 


.3 


1.0 


.8 


.4 


Very heavy resistance 
2:1 


.9 


.6 


.4 


1.5 


1.0 


.6 


Heavy resistance 
3:1 


1.2 


.75 


.5 


20 


1.3 


.8 


Medium resistance 
4:1 


1.4 


1.0 


.5 


24 


1.75 


.9 


Light resistance 
5:1 


1.5 


1.1 


.6 


2.6 


20 


1.0 


Negligible resistance 
4:1 


1.7+ 


1.3+ 


.6 + 


3.0+ 


2.3+ 


1.1 + 


Opposed doctrinal rates of advance 

6 km/h covering force 1 km/h 10 min 
2 km/h MBA 1 km/h 30 min 
5 km/h rear 1 km/h 12 min 



Figure 2-10. Threat rates off advance. 



2-17 



FM 34-2-1 



template and integrates what 
you know about weather and 
terrain. The situation 
templates will show how an 
enemy unit might modify its 
doctrine and tactics because of 
the effects of weather and 
terrain. 



|Figure 2-11 is an example 
of one situation template. It 
is important to understand that 
you should develop as many 
situation templates as there 
are enemy COAs. This allows 
you to thoroughly examine what 
options the enemy has for each 
COA. 

For example, you may 
discover enemy forces have to 
use specific bridges, road 
intersections, or mobility 
corridors (MCs) for a specific 
COA. Or you may discover that 
the terrain offers the enemy 
several choices to attack. Or 
you may determine the terrain 
offers a limited number of 
suitable enemy defensive 
positions. And you may learn 
that the terrain only provides 
a limited number of concealed 
routes for enemy reconnaissance 
to enter your sector. 

The bridges, road 
intersections, and possible 
defensive positions you have 
identified become NAI. Focus 
your attention on these NAI 
because it is there you expect 
something to happen. What you 
see or fail to see at your NAI 
will confirm whether or not the 
enemy is doing what you 
expected them to do, as 
projected on the situation 



template. NAI do several 
things for you. They— 

o Focus the collection 
effort on specific points or 
areas of the battlefield. 

o Tell you what to look for 
and when you should expect to 
see it, at those points or 
areas on the battlefield (based 
on the situation templates). 

o Enable you to decide 
which of your R&S assets are 
best suited to cover a 
particular NAI. For example, 
a point NAI for a road 
intersection where you expect 
to see a motorized rifle 
company (MRC) might require 
seismic-acoustic sensors. On 
the other hand, an area NAI 
designated for a dug-in BMP 
platoon might require a 
dismounted patrol. 

Remember, one of the things 
you did during threat 
evaluation was to determine 
enemy rates of advance. You 
now put this knowledge to work 
by developing time phase lines 
(TPLs) . Think of TPLs as 
snapshots of an enemy or a 
friendly frontline trace. A 
series of TPLs would portray 
friendly or enemy movement over 
a period of time. 

Event Template 

If you combine NAI with 
TPLs, you will be able to show 
approximately when and where 
you would expect to see enemy 
critical events occur. This 
is basically what the event 



2-18 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 2-11. Situation template. 



2-19 



FM 34-2-1 



template does, 
a sample event 



Figure 2-12| is 
:emplate. 



The event template allows 
you to— 

o Confirm or deny your 
situation templates. 

o Gauge enemy and friendly 
rates of movement. 

o Compare rates of movement 
between MCs and AAs. 

o Cue other collection 
assets based on friendly and 
enemy movement. 

Of all IPB products, the 
event template is the most 
important product for the R&S 
effort. As you will see, the 
event template is also the 
basis for the decision support 
template (DST). 

In many situations you 
might find it helpful to 
calculate how long an enemy 
unit would take to move from 
one NAI to another. Normally, 
your calculations will be based 
on opposition and doctrinal 
rates of advance. Situational 
aspects such as weather, 
terrain, and your previous 
hindering actions are also 
factored in. 

Comparing actual movement 
rates with your calculations 
will tell you whether the enemy 
is moving slower or faster than 
expected. It will also help 
you predict how long it will 
actually take the enemy to 
reach a certain point (your 
FEBA, for example). 



Event Analysis Matrix 

The event analysis matrix 
is a tool used along with the 
event template to analyze 



specific events. [Figure 2-13 



shows examples of event 
analysis matrixes. 

Basically, you calculate 
the not earlier than (NET) and 
the not later than (NLT) times 
lead elements of a unit will 
arrive at an NAI. Determine 
the distance between NAI and 
multiply the distance by the 
expected rate of advance. 

For example, suppose the 
distance between NAI 1 and NAI 
2 is 2.5 kilometers. Suppose 
also, for the sake of this 
example, that the enemy 
expected rate of advance is 6 
kilometers per hour, or 1 
kilometer every 10 minutes. 
Use this formula to calculate 
time: 



distance 
rate 



= time 



2.5 km -r .1 km (1 km every 
10 minutes) = 25 minutes. 
Therefore, it takes the unit 25 
minutes to travel from NAI 1 to 

NAI 2. 

Decision Support 
Template 

The final IPB product is 
the DST. The purpose of the 
DST is to synchronize all 
battlefield operating systems 
(BOS) to the commander's best 
advantage. The DST consists of 
target areas of interest (TAI), 
decision points or lines, TPLs, 



2-20 



FM 34-2-1 



+ 3 




+ 2.5 



LEGEND: 



Expected enemy avenues of approach. 



Time phase lines. 



Figure 2-12. Event template. 



2-21 



FM 34-2-1 



AVENUE OF APPROACH: COORDINATES: 


MOBILITY CORRIDOR: 1 P^T^iOJB 


NAI 


DISTANCE 
(KM) 


RATE OF 
MOVEMENT 


NET ^^" 
./^NLT 


TIME OBSERVED 


ACTIVITY 


TIME CONFIRMED 


1. 


— 


— 


/ H-hours 




Enemy recon elements, 
groups, and patrols move 
along MC 1. 




2. 


18 km 


20 km 


H + 54 min^/ 
// H + 69 min 




Activity is as per NAI 1. 




3. 


20 km 


20 km 


H + 114 min / 
/ H + 144 min 




Recon elements assume 
screen positions. 




AVENUE OF APPROACH: COORDINATES: 


MOBILITY CORRIDOR: 1 P^SSO^PA^O 


NAI 


DISTANCE 
(KM) 


RATE OF 
MOVEMENT 


NET ^^^ 
^^^NLT 


TIME OBSERVED 


ACTIVITY 


TIME CONFIRMED 


1. 


— 


— 


/H-hours 




Enemy MRBs conduct 
night river crossing with 
illumination. 




Z 


20 km 


20KmPh 


H + 1 / 
y\\ + 75 min 




Enemy counterattack with 
reinforced TB. 




3. 


18 km 


20 KmPh 


H + 104 min^/ 
^H + 144 min 




Enemy reinforce MRB 
shifting into prebattle 
formation. 





Figure 2-13. Event analysis matrixes. 



2-22 



FM 34-2-1 



and a synchronization matrix 



Figure 2-14 



shows a DST. 



There are many important 
things you should know about 
the DST. First, the DST is 
a total staff product, not 
something the S2 makes in 
isolation. Although you may 
begin the process of developing 
the DST, the S3 and the 
commander drive the 
development. 

Second, the DST is a 

¥roduct of war gaming, 
ogether with the rest of the 
staff, you develop friendly 
COAs which consider what you 
envision the enemy doing. As 
a result of this action, 
reaction, and counteraction 
war game, you identify actions 
and decisions that may occur 
during the battle. 

Third, the R&S plan must 
support the DST. 

Fourth, you can use the 
DST, as well as the general 
battle plan, to synchronize 
the R&S effort. 

As a result of the 
war-gaming process, the 
staff identifies HPTs--those 
enemy weapon systems and 
units that must be acquired 
and successfully attacked 
for the success of the 
friendly commander's mission. 
The staff identifies HPTs from 
the list of HVTs you developed 
during threat evaluation. 
(See FM 6-20-10, TTP for 
the Targeting Process.) 



Once the staff has decided 
on HPTs, it begins to identify 
where on the battlefield it can 
best interdict them. These 
interdicting sites are labelled 
TAI . The next step is for the 
staff to decide how best to 
interdict the enemy at a 
particular TAI. The method of 
interdiction will determine the 
location of decision points or 
lines. 

Decision points or lines 
are a time and a place on the 
battlefield which represent the 
last chance your commander has 
to decide to use a specific 
system for a particular TAI. 
Once the enemy or friendly 
forces pass the decision point, 
the ability to use that system 
is lost. Logically, you should 
monitor decision points to 
detect if and when enemy units 
enter and to confirm enemy 
rates of movement. 

This logical relationship 
shows that NAI (such as your 
event template) must support 
your decision points. Tnere is 
a relationship between NAI and 
TAI as well. If battle damage 
assessment of a particular TAI 
is important, your event 
template (and your R&S plan) 
must support that TAI. 

RECONNAISSANCE & SURVEILLANCE 
PLAN DEVELOPMENT 

There are many things you 
must consider when you develop 
the R&S plan. You will 
probably have to think about 
fire support, maneuver, 



2-23 



FM 34-2-1 







v,P« -» \ 




PL A " PLB 

Dl V \ — ..1 __ 








rL A 


1 

b 






1] l Y^\l 




=S 


p 




[ai \^S?J ,,i,, »v \ Hfok 




^^^jL-^ 


M 


^^\ Y(ilC 


r ^f£®\ wh 




Mr* 


Kl " / J} 


J- 1 lU/w ATCH&S \VJ 




\^/j 


R I Aim. 


(T]tai 


H 




h^k 




m 




PIR river 


JAM recon. 


— i 


PIR 2d echelon. JAM 


* 


JAM 


PIR 2d 


> 




INTELLIGENCE 


crossing 

and 

recon. 






regiment Counter comm. 




division 
comm. 


echelon 
division. 














2/68 north. 




Attack hills 




Screen forward 




MANEUVER 












E of WATCH. 




Continue attack \ 
or pursuit, \ 




HPT: 


Suppress 


CUE 


HPT: 1st echelon defensive 


CUE tab. 


HPT: OBJ 






FIRE 
SUPPORT 


Recon 


recon. 


tab 


TAIs and ADA, 




WATCH. 




J 


and 






Smoke crossing sites 








/ 


security 






3 and 4, Air strike E bank. 








/ 




forces. 




















Status: 
Tight 






Upgrade ADA alert 












ADA 






Concentrate on rotary 




















aircraft. 














Priority 






AVLB: Forward 


Establish 








M/CM/S 


engineer 
S-->N. 
MOPP 2. 






countermeasures on road 
toN. 


decon site 
on river. 






















Move trains 




Trains cross 


CSS 












to W bank. 




river. 






Establish 






Jump main forward TAC to 








Continue attack. 




c 3 


retrans 






C2 crossing. 








\ 


on high 


















ground 














/ 




to rear. 














/ 



Figure 2-14. Decision support template. 



2-24 



FM 34-2-1 



engineer augmentation, and 
command and control (C 2 ). 
You will also want to make sure 
the R&S plan fits into your 
commander's overall scheme of 
maneuver. 

You will want to make sure 
the R&S plan is closely tied to 
fire support and maneuver for 
the CR mission as well. You 
can synchronize these elements 
by completing the synchroniza- 
tion matrix as a staff. Once 
again, completing the matrix 
can only be done by war gaming. 

We have discussed IPB and 
the importance of doing as much 
as you can ahead of time. The 

grimary reason for this is 
ecause you will not have a lot 
of time for in-depth analysis 
in the field. 

On one hand, your higher 
headquarters normally gives you 
a deadline to develop and 
forward a copy of your R&S 
plans to them. You want to get 
your assets out looking as soon 
as possible. On the other 
hand, you may feel you have to 
wait until your subordinates 
give you their R&S plans. 

Do not wait! "Time is 
blood!" The faster your R&S 
assets are out looking, the 
more time they will have to 
find what you want. 

Do not delay your planning 
because you do not have a 
complete situation template, or 
because you do not have all 

our subordinate units' plans. 

f necessary, give your K&S 



i 



assets an initial mission and 
update the mission when you 
have had the time to do more 
detailed planning. 

The technique that allows 
you, your subordinate units, 
and your higher headquarters 
to conduct R&S planning 
simultaneously is the use 
of limits of responsibility. 
A limit of responsibility is 
a boundary defining where a 
particular unit should 
concentrate its R&S efforts. 

In essence, a limit of 
responsibility is a "no further 
than" line; it tells the unit, 
"your R&S responsibility stops 
here." |Figure 2-15| is an 
example or limits of 
responsibility for battalions, 
brigades, and divisions. They 
may be tied to a unit's AI or 
may depend entirely on mission, 
enemy, terrain, time, and 
troops available (METT-T). 

The key is that limits of 
responsibility allow each 
echelon to formulate its R&S 
plan independently. It is 
important to note that an R&S 
plan is never a finished 
product. Because the situation 
and the operational plan will 
most likely change, the R&S 
plan must change to fit them. 

This chapter discussed R&S 
and CR definitions, PIR, the 
contributions of IPB to R&S, 
and limits of responsibility. 
If you understand these 
concepts, you have a solid 
foundation on which to build 
your R&S plan. The next 



2-25 



FM 34-2-1 



chapter talks about assets you 
may have available to you. 
These will be the bridks for 



you to actually build your 
plan. 




2-26 



Figure 2-15. R&S limits of responsibility. 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 3 
ASSETS AND EQUIPMENT 



Before you can develop an 
R&S plan you must know the 
characteristics of available 
assets and equipment. This 
chapter discusses the organic 
and supporting R&S assets and 
equipment available to you, 
the maneuver battalion, and 
the brigade S2. This chapter 
also discusses the basic 
capabilities and limitations 
of these assets. 

Due to security 
classifications, detailed 
information on some assets 
is not included. Refer to the 
appropriate field manuals for 
further details. Some assets 
are staff officers; this 
chapter gives you the types of 
information they can provide 
and equipment they might use. 

ASSETS AND EQUIPMENT ORGANIC 
TO THE MANEUVER BATTALION 

At the battalion level the 
commander is fighting close-in 
operations. To support the 
commander, focus the collection 
effort at the 1st- and 
2d-echelon battalions of 
lst-echelon regiments (out to 
15 kilometers). The assets 
available to conduct R&S 
missions at the battalion 
are limited. Since the assets 
available to conduct R&S 
missions at the battalion 



are limited, the S2 faces a 
challenge when planning R&S 
operations. Some of the 
available assets are scouts, 
patrols, OPs/LPs, soldiers, 
and equipment. 

SCOUT PLATOON 

The scout platoon's primary 
missions in support of the 
battalion are reconnaissance 
and screening. FM 17-98 
contains a detailed discussion 
of scout platoons. Presently 
all scout platoons are being 
reequipped with 10 high 
mobility multipurpose wheeled 
vehicles (HMMWVs). 

Capabilities 

The scout platoon can 
perform missions— 

o Mounted or dismounted. 

o In various terrain 
conditions. 

o Under all weather 
conditions. 

o Day and night. 

The primary mission of the 
scout platoon is reconnais- 
sance. The scout platoon, with 
fire support protection, can 
conduct reconnaissance missions 



3-1 



FM 34-2-1 



10 to 15 kilometers beyond the 
FEBA. These distances vary 
with the type of scout platoon 
and METT-T. 

The scout platoon is the 
only asset found at the 
maneuver battalion specifically 
trained to conduct reconnais- 
sance. Other missions the 
scout platoon conducts are— 

o Quartering party duties. 

o NBC reconnaissance, 
including chemical detection 
and radiological surveying and 
monitoring. 

o Limited pioneer and 
demolition. 

o Security missions. 

o Reconnoiter and establish 
OPs and LPs. 

Limitations 

The scout platoon conducts 
reconnaissance operations as 
part of a larger combined 
arms force. The scout platoon 
depends on its parent unit 
for combat support and combat 
service support to augment 
and sustain its operations. 
Remember, the scout platoon's 
design and training is to 
reconnoiter platoon size 
areas only. 

In addition, a full 
strength platoon-- 



o Reconnoiters only a 
single route during route 
reconnaissance; METT-T is 
the determining factor. 

o Reconnoiters a zone 3 
to 5 kilometers wide; METT-T 
may increase or decrease the 
zone. 

o During screening 
missions, is extremely limited 
in its ability to destroy or 
repel enemy reconnaissance 
units. 

NOTE : Airborne and light 
infantry scouts are not 
mounted; they reconnoiter 
areas out 500 to 1,000 meters 
during most missions. 

o During CR operations, 
can only acquire and maintain 
visual contact with the enemy; 
can kill or repel enemy 
reconnaissance elements only 
if augmented or task organized 
with infantry, armor, or AT 
assets. 

o Operates six OPs for 
limited periods (under 12 
hours); or three OPs for 
extended periods (over 12 
hours ) . The light scout 
platoon usually operates 
three OPs. 

o Is restricted in the 
distance it can operate 
from the main body, due to 
communications range and 
range of supporting elements. 



3-2 



FM 34-2-1 



o Cannot operate 
continuously on all battalion 
nets (such as battalion 
command, operations and 
intelligence, rear operations, 
and mortar) while operating on 
the platoon net. The platoon 
leader can monitor only two 
nets at the same time. 

o Uses the HMMWV with only 
a 30-inch fording capability; 
its reconnaissance, 
surveillance, target 
acquisition, and night 
observation equipment includes 
the AN/UAS-11, Night Vision 
Sight; AN/PVS-4, Night Vision 
Sight, Individual Weapon; 
AN/PVS-5, Night Vision Goggles; 
and binoculars. 

PATROLS (MANEUVER ELEMENTS) 

There are two basic 
categories of patrols: 
reconnaissance and combat. A 
patrol is a detachment sent to 
conduct reconnaissance, combat, 
or both. It consists of at 
least two people who may be 
accompanied by specially 
trained personnel or augmented 
with equipment essential to the 
mission. All maneuver elements 
conduct patrols during combat 
operations to provide 
reconnaissance, CR, security, 
and small-scale combat 
operations. 

Reconnaissance patrols 
collect information and confirm 
or disprove the accuracy of 

¥reviously gained information, 
he three types of 
reconnaissance patrols are 
route, area, and zone. 



Combat patrols provide 
security and harass, destroy, 
or capture enemy personnel, 
equipment, and installations. 
The three types of combat 
patrols are raid, ambush, and 
security. 

Capabilities 

Patrols can conduct 
missions mounted or dismounted 
in various terrain and weather 
conditions. Patrols can also 
conduct missions 10 to 15 
kilometers beyond the FEBA. 
Patrols sometimes pass through 
the scout platoon to conduct 
missions. Indirect fire should 
support patrols at all times. 
The distance for patrol 
missions varies with the type 
of patrol and METT-T. The 
company must always coordinate 
with the battalion before the 
patrons departure to eliminate 
redundancy and gaps. 

Limitations 

Patrols have many of the 
same limitations as the scout 
platoon. Patrols normally do 
not provide surveillance for 
extended periods. Patrols can 
reconnoiter an area, establish 
OPs/LPs for a limited period, 
and then leave. 

OBSERVATION POSTS/ 

LISTENING POSTS 
(MANEUVER ELEMENTS) 

Units establish OPs/LPs to 
provide security, surveillance 
of NAI, and early warning of 
enemy activities. They are in 
use extensively during limited 



3-3 



FM 34-2-1 



visibility. Proper emplacement 
includes concealment and unit 
support by fire. 

Patrols differ in training 
and logistic support from scout 
platoons and normally do not 
establish OPs/LPs for extended 
periods. If you use patrols 
to conduct surveillance for 
extended periods, you are 
mismanaging your K&S assets. 
OPs/LPs are tasked to provide 
surveillance for extended 
periods as long as they meet 
the requirements stated above. 

Capabilities 

Units can employ 
practically an unlimited 
number of OPs/LPs. They can 
provide 24-hour coverage if 
they have the proper day and 
night observation devices, 
GSks , or sensors. They can 
remain undetected due to lack 
of movement. Units can use 
OPs/LPs all over the 
battlefield as long as they are 
provided with fire support. 

Limitations 

OPs/LPs cannot operate 
for 24 hours if they do not 
have the proper equipment. 
A security element must be 
near the OP/LP to provide 
support and security in a 
timely manner. 

SOLDIERS 

During combat, soldiers 
are scattered all over the 
battlefield; thus, they can 



provide a large quantity of 
real-time information. You 
must get involved in the 
training to increase the 
timeliness and accuracy of 
information reported. All 
soldiers, from private to 
general officer, must know 
how to properly send 
information up the chain. 

Capabilities 

Soldiers can determine the 
types and numbers of enemy 
approaching. 

Limitations 

Soldiers do not always have 
the right equipment to send 
information quickly. 

EQUIPMENT 

Night observation devices 
(NODS) are either active or 
passive equipment designed to 
permit observation during 
darkness. Active equipment 
transmits infrared or white 
light to illuminate the 
target. Passive devices use 
either ambient light (from the 
stars, moon, or other 
low-intensity illumination) or 
operate by detecting the 
differences in heat (infrared 
energy) radiated by different 
objects. Heavy ram, snow, 
fog, or smoke degrade the 
effectiveness of these 
devices. You should use NODS 
on night p atrols and OPs/LPs. 
IFigure 3-l| shows observation 
equipment associated with the 
maneuver battalion. 



3-4 



FM 34-2-1 



DEVICE 



CAPABILITIES 



ADVANTAGES AND 
CHARACTERISTICS DISADVANTAGES 



AN/PVS-2 NV 200 to 400 m 
Individual Weapon 



AN/TVS-2 NV 
Sight, 
Crew-served 
Weapons 

AN/TVS-4 NV 



AN/PVS-4 NV 
Sight, 
Individual 
Weapons 

AN/TVS-5 
Sight, 
Crew-served 
Weapons 

AN/PVS-5 NVG 



An/TAS-5 

Thermal 

Dragon 

Sight 

light 



AN/UAS-12 
Thermal TOW 
Sight 



1,000 m 
starlight, 
1,200 m 
moonlight 

1,200 to 
2,000 m 

400 m 
starlight, 
600 m 
moonlight 

1,000 m 
starlight, 
1,200 m 
moonlight 

150 m 



1,000 m 
( + ) 



3,000 m 

(+) 



Weight 6 lbs Not detectable. 
4 x magnification 

Weight 15 lbs Not detectable. 



Weight 3.6 lbs Not detachable. 
7 x magnification 

Weight 3.6 lbs Not detectable. 



Weight 7 lbs 



Weight 1.9 lbs 



Weight 22 lbs 



Not detectable. 



Not detectable. 
Eye fatigue 
after 3 to 5 
hours . 

Penetrates all 
conditions of 
limited visi- 
bility and 
foliage. Not 
detectable. 
Short battery 
and coolant 
bottle life. 



Weight 18.7 lbs Same as 

AN/TAS-5, 



A/V 



Figure 3-1. Observation equipment associated with the maneuver battalion. 



3-5 



FM 34-2-1 



Mr 



DEVICE 



CAPABILITIES 



CHARACTERISTICS 



ADVANTAGES AND 
DISADVANTAGES 



AN/UAS-11 

Thermal 

NOD 

Binoculars 



3,000 m 
(+) 



Intensifies 
natural light, 



AN/PAQ-4 150 m 

Infrared (limited by 
Aiming Light PVS-5) 



AN/PAS-7 
Hand-Held 
Thermal 
Viewer 



Detects 
personnel 
at 400 m, 
at 1 km. 



Weight 58.4 lbs 
w/tripod 



7 x 50 power 
or 6 x 30 power 



Weight .5 lbs 
Used with 
AN/PVS-5 and 
mounts on Ml 6. 

Weight 9.5 lbs 



Same as 

AN/TAS-5, 



Not detectable. 
Requires some 
type of visible 
light. 

Permits aimed 
fire during 
darkness. 
Detectable. 

Penetrates all 
conditions of 
limited visi- 
bility and 
light foliage. 
Not detectable 



Figure 3-1. Observation equipment associated with the maneuver battalion (continued). 



ASSETS AND PERSONNEL 

NORMALLY SUPPORTING 

THE MANEUVER BATTALION 

Assets and personnel that 
normally support the maneuver 
battalion include GSR, REMBASS, 
field artillery, engineer 
olatoon, air defense artillery 
olatoon, Army aviation, and 
:actical Air Force. 

GROUND SURVEILLANCE RADAR 

GSR provides the tactical 
commander with timely combat 
information and target 
acquisition data. The primary 
capability of GSR is to search, 
detect, and locate moving 



objects durine limited 
visibility. GSR is capable of 
accurately locating targets for 
rapid engagement. It provides 
early warning of enemy movement 
and assists friendly forces in 
movement control. 

Tasks 

GSR is used to— 

o Detect enemy movement 
during limited visibility. 

o Monitor NAI. 

o Monitor barriers and 
obstacles to detect enemy 
breaching. 



3-6 



FM 34-2-1 



o Monitor flanks. 

o Extend the capabilities 
of patrols and OPs/LPs. 

o Vector patrols. 

o During daylight, detect 
enemy obscured by haze, smoke, 
or fog. 

o Monitor possible drop 
zones or landing zones. 

Capabilities 

GSRs can— 

o Penetrate smoke, haze, 
fog, light rain and snow, and 
light foliage. 

o Operate in complete 
darkness. 

o Detect moving personnel 
and equipment. 

o Be moved around on the 
battlefield. 

o Provide adjustment of 
indirect fire. 

Limitations 

GSR limitations are— 

o Emits active radar waves 
which are subject to enemy 
detection and electronic 
countermeasures (ECM) . 

o Performance is degraded 
by heavy rain or snow and dense 
foliage. 



o Line of sight (LOS) 
operation only. 

o Limited mobility of the 
AN/PPS-5. 

o Limited range of the 
AN/PPS-15. 

Characteristics 

GSR should be used with 
NODS as complementary 
surveillance devices, since 
each device can be used to 
overco me the limi tations of the 
other. | Figure 3-2| shows GSR 
characteristics. GSRs are 
organic to the MI battalion, 
intelligence and surveillance 
(I&S) company. The MI 
Battalion provides GSRs in 
direct support (DS) of brigade 
operations. GSR teams that are 
DS to the brigade can be 
attached to maneuver battalion 
and company elements to support 
the commanders. 

Radar Allocation 

Radar is allocated as 
follows: 

o Heavy Division: 

—Three squads of four 
teams each. 

—One PPS-5 per team 
equals 12 PPS-5's. 

o Light Division: 

—Four squads of three 
teams each. 



3-7 



FM 34-2-1 





AN/PPS-5 


AN/PPS-15 


RANGE: Personnel 
Vehicles 


6,000 m 
10,000 m 


1,500 m 
3,000 m 


ACCURACY: Range 
Azimuth 


±20m 
±10 mils 


+20 m 
+ 10mils 


* SECTOR SCAN: 


Automatic -553, 1,067, 1,600, 
and 1,955 mils (selectable) 


Automatic 

800 or 1,600 mils 


INDICATORS: 


Audio and visual 
(A- and B- scope) 


Audio and visual 
(digital readout) 


REMOTE CAPABILITY: 15.24m 9.144m 
* Both radars can be manually rotated to any azimuth and manual scanning can be performed. 



Figure 3-2. GSR characteristics. 



—One PPS-15 per team 
equals 12 PPS-15's. 

o Airborne division and air 
assault division: 

—Three squads of four 
teams each. 

—Three PPS-15's per 
squad equal nine PPS-15's 
(two-person team). 

—One PPS-5 per squad 
equals three PPS-5's 
(three-person team). 

Site Selection Factors 

General site selection 
should be made in close 
coordination with the GSR team 
leader whenever possible; 
specific site selection should 
always be left to the team 
leader. This takes advantage 



of the team leader's expertise 
and knowledge of the GSK. Site 
selection should provide— 

o Protection by combat 
elements, as far forward as 
possible to provide the 
earliest warning. 

o LOS between radar and 
target. 

o Communication capability. 

o Concealment and cover. 

o Protection against ECM. 

Remember, radars are an 
extreme electronic security 
risk. Both the main and side 
lobes emit sufficient energy 
for the enemy to detect and 
use radio ECM. GSRs, once 
detected, can give indicators 
to the enemy showing the size 



3-8 



FM 34-2-1 



and disposition of friendly 
elements. GSRs can be 
destroyed or jammed. The 
following are common-sense 
OPSEC measures to be used with 
GSRs: 

o Use terrain or vegetation 
to absorb or scatter side 
lobes. 

o Place radar site so the 
target is between the radar and 
the hills or forests to limit 
the detection range. 

o Schedule random operating 
periods of short duration. 

GSRs can be used in tandem 
with two or more widely 
dispersed radars having the 
capability to illuminate the 
same target area, alternating 
operation times. The GSR can 
also be used with a night 
vision device that may not have 
the same range capability, but 
will provide some coverage when 
the radar is turned off. 

REMBASS 

REMBASS is organic to the 
airborne, air assault, and 
light division MI battalion, 
I&S company. REMBASS can 
remain under division, in 
general support (GS); or the 
division can provide it in DS 
to maneuver brigades, division 
support command headquarters, 
armored cavalry squadron, or 
maneuver battalion. REMBASS 
teams report directly to the 
G2 or S2 of the supported 
unit. The sensor monitoring 



set, which functions as the 
sensor output display, provides 
target identification and 
classification. In most cases, 
the sensor monitoring set is 
placed at the supported unit's 
TOC. 

REMBASS teams hand deploy 
the sensors and repeaters; they 
also provide personnel to 
operate a monitoring device. 
REMBASS allocations are 
different for all divisions 
and are based on each 
divisions particular mission. 
It is important to remember 
to include the REMBASS team 
leader in planning REMBASS 
missions. 

Capabilities 

REMBASS is an all-weather, 
day or night surveillance 
system, activated by magnetic, 
seismic-acoustic, or infrared 
changes from moving targets. 
REMdASS transmits target data 
by FM radio link to the 
monitors. With this data the 
operator can determine the 
target's-- 

o Direction of travel. 

o Rate of speed. 

o Length of column. 

o Approximate number. 

o Type (Personnel or 
wheeled or tracked vehicles). 

REMBASS can operate in 
unusual climatic conditions and 



3-9 



FM 34-2-1 



on varied terrain. REMBASS 
has transmission ranges of 15 
kilometers (ground-to-ground), 
and 100 kilometers (ground- 
to-air). Because or the 
flexibility and wide range 
of REMBASS application, 
various sensor combinations 
can be selected to suit any 
given mission. 

Limitations 

Hand emplacement of sensors 
and repeaters in hostile areas 
increases employment response 
time. The sensor requires 
radio LOS to transmit data to 
the monitor. The equipment's 
weight and size limit the 
amount and distance personnel 
can hand carry for emplacement. 
REMBASS receivers are highly 
susceptible to electronic 
jamming; barrage jamming being 
the most effective. Operator 
proficiency greatly affects the 
results obtained. 

Equipment 

REMBASS teams normally use 
three different types of 
sensors: magnetic, 
seismic-acoustic, and 
infrared-passive. The sensors 
are arrayed in strings which 
complement one another. The 
sensors function automatically, 
transmitting information when 
movement, sound, or heat 
activates them. 

Each sensor has detection 
and classification techniques 
suited to the physical 



disturbance (such as magnetic, 
seismic-acoustic, infrared- 
passive). Each sensor has a 
self-disabling and anti- 
tampering feature built into 
it. 

Experience during Operation 
Desert Shield indicates an 
increased radius of detection 
for sensors emplaced in sand or 
sandy soil with a silica base, 
while sensors emplaced in loose 
rocky soil degrades sensor 
detection radius. Therefore, 
it is very important to check 
the detection radius of each 
sensor in the type soil of its 
intended employment and 
annotate the results on the 
Sensor Operator Data Record, 
if the situation permits. 

Magnetic sensor . The magnetic 
sensor uses a passive magnetic 
technique to detect targets 
and determine the direction 
of movement (left to right 
and right to left). This 
sensor detects moving objects 
that are at least partially 
made of ferrous materials. 
The magnetic sensor will not 
classify targets. The magnetic 
sensor is most effectively 
used as a count indicator 
for vehicles. 

Detection ranges of the 
magnetic sensor are— 

o Armed personnel, 3 
meters. 

o Wheeled vehicles, 15 
meters. 



3-10 



FM 34-2-1 



o Tracked vehicles, 25 
meters. 

Due to these detection 
ranges, REMBASS teams must 
use these sensors within 
proximity of the expected 
routes of travel. The weight 
of this sensor and battery is 3 
kilograms. 

Seismic-acoustic sensor. The 
seismic-acoustic sensor detects 
and classifies personnel and 
wheeled or tracked vehicles by 
analyzing target signature. 
It transmits a target 
classification report to the 
monitor. The weight of the 
sensor and its battery is 3 
kilograms. 

Detection ranges for the 
seismic-acoustic sensor are-- 

o Personnel, 50 meters. 

o Wheeled vehicles, 250 
meters. 

o Tracked vehicles, 350 
meters. 

Infrared-passve sensor. This 
sensor detects and responds to 
a temperature change of 1.5 
degrees Celsius within its 
field of view. It can 
determine the direction of 
motion relative to the sensor 
position. The infrared-passive 
sensor is most effectively used 
as a count indicator for 
personnel. The weight of the 
sensor and battery is 3 
kilograms. 



Detection ranges of the 
infrared-passive sensor are-- 

o Personnel, 3 to 20 
meters. 

o Vehicles, 3 to 50 meters. 

Radio repeater . The radio 
repeater relays data 
transmissions between the 
sensors and the monitoring 
sites. The radio repeater 
intercepts the encoded radio 
message from either a REMBASS 
sensor or another like 
repeater. 

Ranges of the repeater 
are-- 

o 15 kilometers 
ground-to-ground. 

o 100 kilometers 
ground-to-air. 

The repeater, like the 
sensors, has a self-disabling 
and antitampering feature built 
into it. The weight of the 
repeater and three batteries 
is 15 kilograms. 

Additional equipment. 
Additional equipment for the 
sensor includes-- 

o A code programmer for 
programming a sensor or 
repeater to a desired operating 
channel. 

o The antenna group for 
the REMBASS sensor monitoring 
set receives transmissions from 
extended ranges. 



3-11 



FM 34-2-1 



o Sensor monitoring sets 
for monitoring REMBASS 
radio-linked sensor and 
repeater transmissions. 

o A portable radio 
frequency monitor to monitor 
sensors and repeaters. It 
is used primarily during 
emplacement of sensors to 
test operational status and 
radio LOS. It can also be 
used as a backup if the sensor 
monitoring set becomes 
inoperative. 



Figure 3-3| shows site 
symbols . Adjacent brigades 
or battalions can monitor the 
same sensors if they exchange 
radio frequency information. 
This lateral monitoring 
increases the surveillance 
of units and promotes the 
exchange of intelligence. 
For additional information 
on REMBASS characteristics and 
employment techniques, refer 
to FM 34-10-1. 

FIELD ARTILLERY 

To properly integrate field 
artillery assets into the R&S 
and CR plans, you must 
understand the capabilities and 
limitations of this equipment. 

A field artillery battalion 
is both a producer and a 
consumer of combat information. 
Field artillery battalions in 
DS of brigades provide each 
maneuver battalion headquarters 
a fire support element (FSE). 
This element is headed by an 
FSO. The FSE helps plan, 
direct, and coordinate fire 



support operations. The FSE 
also provides a fire support 
team (FIST) to each maneuver 
company. 

Forward observers (FOs) 
from each FIST are deployed 
to platoons (except in armor 
battalions) and may accompany 
reconnaissance patrols or help 
operate OPs. FOs observe the 
battlefield to detect, 
identify, locate, and 
laser-designate targets for 
suppression, neutralization, 
or destruction. They report 
both targeting data and combat 
information to the maneuver 
battalion FSO and S2. 

The FISTs and FOs are 
specially equipped for their 
mission. The laser range 
finder provides an accurate 
distance measurement to a 
target. Using the ground or 
vehicular laser locator 
designator, the FO can 
determine distance, direction, 
and vertical angle. The FO 
can also laser-designate 
targets for Army, Navy, and 
Air Force laser-guided 
munitions. 

The capability of the FIST 
to provide real-time combat 
information cannot be 
overemphasized. The FIST 
vehicle (FISTV) is capable of 
accurate target location 
through the combination of a 
manual calculation laser range 
finder and a self-location 
capability. It has a digital 
and voice interface with the 
fire support system and a 
thermal sight. 



3-12 



FM 34-2-1 



SENSOR SYMBOL 



REQUIRED INFORMATION 



INFORMATION LEGEND 





A = Type of sensor (such 
as Mag, SA, IR) 

B = ID code(s) and 
channel of sensor 

C = Team and unit 
emplacing sensor 

D s= SMS pen number 



MONITOR SYMBOL 



REQUIRED INFORMATION 



INFORMATION LEGEND 





A = Receiver channel 
(designate A or B 
when using the SMS) 

B « Team and unit 



REPEATER SYMBOL 




REQUIRED INFORMATION 




INFORMATION LEGEND 



C = Receiver and transmitting 
channel 

D = Team and unit emplacing 
the repeater 



NOTE: The bottom of the 
diamond points to the sensor 
location. 



Figure 3-3. Site symbols. 



3-13 



FM 34-2-1 



The FISTV can locate 
targets out to 10 kilometers 
ana designate targets out to 5 
kilometers. However, its 
electro-optics capability 
cannot provide acquisition 
beyond direct fire range (5 
kilometers). 

Maneuver company and troop 
FISTS and combat observation 
and laser teams use the FISTV. 
The FISTV has only LOS 
target-acquisition capability. 
When on the move, it cannot 
designate targets. The thermal 
sight's range limitation is 
within 3 kilometers of its 
field of vision. Being mounted 
on an M113 chassis, it lacks 
the mobility and armor 
protection of the maneuver 
forces it supports. 

ENGINEER PLATOON 

The maneuver battalion 
receives engineer support from 
the engineer company normally 

& laced in DS of the brigade, 
sually an engineer platoon 
supports a battalion. The 
mission of this engineer 
platoon is to provide mobility, 
counter mobility, survivability, 
and general engineering 
support. 

As the S2, you should learn 
to tap into this valuable 
resource for detailed 
information on natural and 
constructed terrain features. 
The S3 and the engineer support 
officer need to coordinate with 
each other to integrate 
engineer assets into the R&S 
and CR plans. The engineer 



support officer can provide key 
information about tne terrain 
without your having to send out 
a reconnaissance patrol. In 
some cases it would prove 
valuable to have engineers go 
along with reconnaissance 
patrols. Engineers can provide 
expert terrain and obstacle 
analysis. 

AIR DEFENSE ARTILLERY 

PLATOON 

Short-range air defense 
elements normally support the 
maneuver battalion. These may 
include Stinger teams or 
sections and Vulcan squads. 
The air defense artillery (ADA) 
platoon or section leader 
functions as the battalion air 
defense officer. The ADA 
leader works closely with the 
battalion S2, S3-air, FSO, and 
air liaison officer (ALO) to 
plan and coordinate air defense 
support. 

Specifically, the ADA 
leader would coordinate with 
you to pinpoint areas of enemy 
air and ground activity. The 
battalion air defense officer 
can tap into resources that 
look through the battlefield to 
determine areas of enemy air 
activity, thus revealing enemy 
ground activity. 

The forward area alerting 
radar (FAAR) and target data 
display set provide air alert 
warning information to Vulcan 
squads and Stinger teams. This 
warning includes tentative 
identification, approximate 
range, and azimuth of 



3-14 



FM 34-2-1 



approaching low-altitude 
aircraft out to 20 kilometers. 

ARMY AVIATION 

Aviation units support 
maneuver brigade and oattalion 
commanders. They provide a 
responsive, mobile, and 
extremely flexible means to 
find, fix, disrupt, and destroy 
enemy forces and their 
supporting command, control, 
and communications (C^) 
facilities. Some aviation 
assets are capable of 
performing limited 
reconnaissance missions; 
however, most will collect 
information only as part of 
normal aviation missions. 

You can find out from the 
army aviation support officer 
information concerning enemy 
activity in areas where 
aviation assets fly missions. 
Helicopters can resupply, 
insert, or extract Ors/LPs 
or patrols. Combat aviation 
companies provide airlift 
support for troops and evacuate 
equipment, casualties, and 
enemy prisoners of war (EPWs). 

The OH-58D is found in the 
attack helicopter battalion 
supporting maneuver brigades 
and battalions. The crew of 
the OH-58D consists of a pilot 
and an artillery fire support 
coordinator and observer. This 
aircraft performs two 
functions. First, when in 
support of maneuver battalions 
with FSEs, it is primarily a 
target acquisition and target 
attack system. Second, when in 



support of units where no FSE 
exists, the OH-58D crew 
performs a fire support 
planning and coordination 
function. 

The OH-58D has many of the 
same capabilities as the FISTV. 
It has a thermal sight; a laser 
range finder and designator; a 
self-location capability; and a 
digital and voice inter ace 
with the fire support C^ 
system. It can locate and 
designate targets out to 10 
kilometers. Under less than 
ideal weather conditions it can 
only detect and recognize 
targets to within direct fire 
ranges. 

This system provides— 

o Digital interface with 
fire support C systems. 

o Digital interface with 
Army aviation aircraft equipped 
with the airborne target 
handover system (such as the 
AH-64 Apache). 

o Interface with Air Force 
assets so equipped. 

These characteristics make 
the OH-58D a primary member of 
Joint Air Attack Team (JAAT) 
operations. 

TACTICAL AIR FORCE 

JAAT is a combination of 
Army attack and scout 
helicopters and Air Force close 
air support (CAS). It normally 
operates in support of maneuver 
brigade or battalions. All 



3-15 



FM 34-2-1 



staff officers participate in 
planning missions for Air Force 
support, especially the S2, S3, 
S3-air, FSO, and ALO. 
Coordinate through the ALO to 
receive real-time information 
from these Air Force assets. 

The ALO also provides the 
means to forward immediate 
tactical air reconnaissance 
requests up the chain. Air 
reconnaissance reports, 
in-flight combat information 
reports, and air situation 
reports are all available 
through the ALO. The ALO 
weighs this information against 
information from the CR and the 
R&S plans. In this way the ALO 
can confirm or deny the 
accuracy of those plans. 

ASSETS AND PERSONNEL 

NORMALLY SUPPORTING 

THE MANEUVER BRIGADE 

At brigade level, the 
commander is fighting the 
close-in battle. You, as the 
brigade S2, must support the 
commander. To do this you must 
focus your collection effort at 
the lst-echelon regiments and 
the 2d-echelon regiments 
capable of influencing your 
commanders battle (out to 30 
kilometers) . The brigade has 
limited assets available to 
conduct the collection effort. 
Here are some assets and 
personnel you can use to 
enhance your R&S and CR 
operations. 

IEWSE 

The IEWSE officer provides 
expertise on the capabilities, 



limitations, and employment of 
the intelligence and electronic 
warfare (IEW) equipment 
supporting the brigade. The 
IEWSE- 

o Coordinates IEW support 
of the maneuver brigade. 

o Is the link to the MI 
battalion for support. 

o Communicates with the MI 
bn to receive targeting and 
tasking information. 

EPW INTERROGATORS 

Interrogators screen and 
interrogate EPW, detainees, 
and refugees. Their mission 
is to collect and report all 
information possible to satisfy 
the commander's PIR and IR. 
FM 34-80 contains the types 
of information interrogators 
can obtain and provide. 

COUNTERINTELLIGENCE 

The counterintelligence 
(CI) support team can evaluate 
the vulnerability of friendly 
R&S assets to detection by 
threat R&S and target 
acquisition assets. CI members 
of support teams can identify 
and counter the specific enemy 
target acquisition means which 
pose a significant threat to 
brigade operations. These 
include-- 

o Human intelligence 
(HUMINT). 

o Imagery intelligence 
(IMINT). 



3-16 



FM 34-2-1 



o SIGINT. 

Based on enemy R&S 
activities, you could determine 
which operations security 
(OPSEC) and deception 
operations would work against 
the enemy, after coordination 
with CI personnel. FM 34-80 
has detailed information on CI 
support. 

GSRANDREMBASS 



GSR and REMBASS can be 
kept under brigade control. 

See t hp above paragraph 

titled "Assets and Personnel 



Normally Supporting TKe 



Maneuver Battalion"! for 
specific information. 

ELECTRONIC WARFARE 
COLLECTION SYSTEMS 

These assets operate near 
or within the brigade AO. They 
provide intelligence from 
intercepted enemy emitters. 
Ground-based systems include 
the following: 

o AN/TSQ-138 (TRAILBLAZER) 
is a ground-based HF and VHF 
communications intercept and 
VHF DF system. It is found in 
heavy divisions only. 

o AN/MSQ-103C, Heavy 
Divisions, AN/MSQ-103B, 
Airborne and Air Assault 
Divisions, (TEAMPACK) is a 
ground-based noncommunications 
intercept and line-of-bearing 
(LOB) system. It is found in 
all divisions except light. 



o AN/TLQ-17A (TRAFFIC JAM) 
is a ground-based HF and VHF 
communications intercept and 
jamming system. It is found 
in all divisions except light. 

o AN/TRQ-32 (TEAMMATE) is 
a ground-based HF, VHF, and UHF 
communications intercept and 
LOB system. It is found in all 
divisions. 

o The AN/PRD-10M1/12 is 
a ground-based radio DF system 
capable of being carried by one 
person. It is round in air 
assault, airborne, and light 
divisions, and some heavy 
divisions. 

o AN/ARQ-33A or AN/ALQ-151 
(QUICKFIX) is an airborne 
communications intercept, 
jamming, and DF system. It 
is found in all divisions. 

There are also numerous 
communications jamming 
resources that will be 
available to the commander 
in or near your brigade AO. 
FM 34-80 has detailed 
information about electronic 
warfare (EW) equipment. 

DIVISION INTELLIGENCE 
OFFICER 

The G2 can provide many 
kinds of detailed intelligence. 
The G2 has various assets 
available to collect 
information and can pass this 
down to you as intelligence. 
FM 34-10 has specific 
information concerning these 
assets. 



3-17 



FM 34-2-1 



FIELD ARTILLERY 

Like the maneuver 
battalion, the maneuver brigade 
has an FSO to coordinate fire 
support. The FSO can 
communicate with numerous 
weapon-locating radars. 

Fire Finder Radar 

The target acquisition 
battery of division artillery 
(DIVARTY) has three AN/TPQ-36 
mortar-locating radars and two 
AN/TPQ-37 artillery-locating 
radars. 

The AN/TPQ-36 detects 
mortars and artillery out to 
12 kilometers and detects 
rockets out to 24 kilometers. 

The AN/TPQ-37 detects 
artillery and mortars out to 
30 kilometers and rockets out 
to 50 kilometers. 

Moving Target Locating 
Radars 

The DIVARTY target 
acquisition battery nas either 
one AN/TPS-25A or one 
AN/TPS-58B moving-target- 
locating radar. Tnese 
battlefield surveillance 
radars are similar to the 
GSR. They can detect, 
locate, and distinguish 
wheeled and tracked vehicles 
and dismounted personnel. 

The AN/TPS-25A detects 
moving vehicles out to 18 
kilometers and personnel out 
to 12 kilometers. 



The AN/TPS-58B detects 
moving vehicles out to 20 
kilometers and personnel out 
to 10 kilometers. 

Field Artillery Battalion 
Observation Posts 

Survey parties and other 
trained personnel of the field 
artillery battalion operate the 
battalion OPs. These personnel 
survey designated target areas, 
and record high-burst and mean 

¥oint-of-impact registrations, 
hey send targeting data and 
combat information to the fire 
direction center or the FSO at 
the maneuver battalion or 
brigade. 

Aerial Fire Support 
Officer 

The DIVARTY support platoon 
of the heavy division's combat 
aviation brigade provides 
rotary wing aircraft for 
DIVARTY air observers. Their 
mission is to call for or 
adjust fires from the fire 
support assets. Aerial fire 
support officers-- 

o Cover areas masked from 
ground observers. 

o Cover thinly resourced 
areas. 

o Provide coverage while 
ground-based R&S ana target 
acquisition assets displace. 

o Reinforce surveillance of 
vulnerable areas. 



3-18 



FM 34-2-1 



o Report targeting data and 
combat information to the FSO 
at the maneuver battalion or 
brigade, DIVARTY TOC, or the 
fire direction center. 

ENGINEER AND AIR 
DEFENSE ARTILLERY 

Engineer and ADA support 
officers are located at the 
maneuver brigade. Types of 
information these personnel can 
provide is discussed in the 
above paragraph titled 



and Personnel Normally 
Supporting The Maneuver 
Battalion." I 



'Assets 



AIR AND ARMORED 
CAVALRY SQUADRON 

This squadron supports the 
division by conducting 
reconnaissance and security 
missions. There are four types 
of air and armored cavalry 
squadrons: 

o The air and armored 
cavalry squadron of the heavy 
division consists of two ground 
cavalry troops (M3 equipped); 
and two air cavalry troops 
(OH-58s and attack 
helicopters). 

o The air cavalry squadron 
of the air assault division 
consists of three air cavalry 
troops; and one air assault 
troop. 

o The air cavalry squadron 
of the airborne division 
consists of three air cavalry 
troops; one ground cavalry 
troop (tube-launched, optically 



tracked, wire guided [TOW] 
missile systems and scout 
HMMWVs); and one air assault 
troop. 

o The air cavalry squadron 
of the light division consists 
of two air cavalry troops; and 
one ground cavalry troop (TOW 
and scout HMMWVs) . 

Headquarters and 
headquarters troops and 
maintenance troops are not 
included in the above list. 

ARMY AVIATION 

Attack Helicopter 
Battalions 

These battalions are 
primarily trained to "kill" 
enemy tanks. They can also— 

o Provide aerial escort and 
suppressive fires to support 
air assault operations. 

o Destroy enemy C 3 and 
logistic assets. 

o Conduct JAAT operations. 



If these assets support 
your brigade, they can provide 
detailed information about 
enemy activity. The key to 
obtaining this information is 
to coordinate with the S3-air 
and the Army aviation support 
officer. Refer to the above 
aragraoh titled r Assets and 



i 



ersonnel Normally Supporting 
The Maneuver Battalion] for 



Figure 



additional information. 

3-4l shows an asset deployment 

matrix. This matrix may be 



3-19 



FM 34-2-1 

If these assets support 
your brigade, they can provide 
detailed information about 
enemy activity. The key to 
obtaining this information is 
to coordinate with the S3-air 
and the Army aviation support 
officer. Refer to the above 
aragraph titled rAssets and 



Personnel Normally Supporting 
The Maneuver Battalion I for 



additional information. Figure 
3-4 shows an asset deployment 
matrix. This matrix may be 
used by brigade and battalion 



S2s to keep track of deployed 
assets. 

MILITARY POLICE PLATOON 

The military police (MP) 
platoon supports the maneuver 
brigade during some missions. 
If you have an MP platoon 
supporting your unit, you 
should coordinate with the MP 
platoon leader for 
information. The MP platoon 
can usually coordinate with 
other MPs who are normally 
scattered all over the AO. 



ASSET 
(each system) 






DESIGNATION 
(call sign) 



LOCATION 
(keep current) 



TARGET 

(coordinate 

description, NAI) 



PERSONNEL OR 

EQUIPMENT 

REMARKS 

(report channels) 




Figure 3-4. Asset deployment matrix. 



3-20 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 4 



PLANNING EFFECTIVE RECONNAISSANCE 
AND SURVEILLANCE 



This chapter presents the 
planning steps for effective 
K&S operations. The S2 is 
responsible for making 
recommendations in R&S 
operations. At brigade or 
battalion, you are the driving 
force in the R&S effort. 
(Refer to [Chapter l| for the 
collection management 
process.) These steps apply to 
both brigade and battalion 
levels. 

The first step begins with 
receiving the unit's mission. 
You must understand the 
commander's intent in this 
particular mission. You have 
already completed most of the 
IPB process; but now you must 
produce some of the specific 
information pertaining to the 
mission. 

Once you understand the 
mission, begin to analyze the 
requirements placed on you as 
the S2. The commander should 
tell you the key pieces of 
information needed before and 
during the mission. This key 
information, called PIR, is 
either stated by the commander 
or recommended by you for the 
commander's approval. 

The PIR and IR provide the 
initial focus of the K&S 



effort. The R&S plan should 
answer the PIR and IR. At this 
point you should have a rough 
draft K&S plan, such as when 
and what areas to begin R&S 
operations. (This is part of 
the mission analysis phase of 
the planning process steps.) 

You can now begin adding 
some detail to the K&S plan. 
Integrate any requirements from 
higher headquarters into the 
plan. You have to translate 
the initial PIR and IR into 
indicators on which R&S assets 
can collect. JFigure 4-l| shows 
examples of tne PIR, indicator, 
speciric information 
requirements (SIR), and 
specific orders and requests 
(SOR) process. Additional 
examples of indicators are in 
FM 34-3, Appendix C. Now 
determine the SIR and SOR 
needed for the R&S plan. The 
SIR and SOR ensure assets are 
collecting specific information 
that answers the PIR and IR. 

The event template is a 
product of IPB showing when and 
where the enemy could go. 
Compare the SIK to the event 
template; this comparison 
should indicate when and where 
to send friendly R&S assets. 
Those areas in which you expect 
enemy activity are labeled NAI. 



4-1 



FM 34-2-1 



ENEMY OFFENSE 

PIR: "Will the enemy launch a regimental- or battalion-size 
attack within my sector in the next 12 hours?" - Commander 

Indicator: Reconnaissance and destruction of our defensive 
obstacles. 

NOTE: usually the night preceding an attack, enemy patrols 
reconnoiter friendly obstacles to determine a plan for clearing 
lanes. The patrol destroys only those obstacles that will not 
disclose the direction of the main attack. - Threat Knowledge 

SIR: "is the enemy conducting reconnaissance and clearing 
obstacles along our FL0T?" - S2 

S0R: "Report on status of friendly obstacles and the area 
around the obstacles. Report the location of all destroyed 
friendly obstacles or the indication of recent enemy activity 
around the obstacles (such as tracks, footprints, or crushed 
vegetation)." - S2 

ENEMY DEFENSE 

PIR: "Is the enemy going to defend or will they continue 
the attack?" - Commander 

Indicator: Formation of AT strong points in-depth along 
logical AAs. 

NOTE: The enemy forms AT strong points in-depth along logical 
AAs for armor. These are made up of motorized rifle, engineers, 
and AT gun and missile units strengthened by mines, ditches, and 
other obstacles. - Threat Knowledge 

SIR: "Are the enemy placing their AT weapons forward as 
well as building obstacles?" - S2 

S0R: "Reconnoiter NAI 4. Specifically look for and report 
enemy AT positions (AT 4 or 5 mounted on BMPs or BRDMs) , BMPs, 
and obstacles." - S2 



Figure 4-1. Example of the PIR, indicator, SIR, and SOR process. 



4-2 



FM 34-2-1 



Once you have a picture of 
the coverage required for the 
R&S effort, you should 
prioritize the SIR. Those SIR 
that, when answered, will 
provide the greatest amount of 
intelligence in the shortest 
amount of time should have a 
high priority. (This is part 
of the COA development phase of 
the planning process steps.) 

By now you have set your 
SIR priorities, identified 
areas to send R&S assets, and 
know when to begin the R&S 
mission. For the next step, 
you must be familiar with the 
capabilities and limitations of 
all R&S assets at your 
particular level. Compare the 
SIR with available R&S assets. 
Close coordination between you 
and the other staff officers 
should help ensure the assets 
are properly deployed. 
Development of the R&S plan 
should involve all staff 
officers. Your concern is 
developing IR and guiding 
assets to the proper areas. 

STAFF OFFICER 
RESPONSIBILITIES 

Other staff officers have a 
role in this process. The 
following is a list of these 
officers and their 
responsibilities: 

o The S3 makes sure the 
assets are available and can 
conduct the mission and the R&S 
plan supports the overall 
mission of the unit. 

o The CI officer apprises 
you of the vulnerability of 



your R&S assets to enemy 
collection and target 
capabilities. 

o The FSO coordinates 
indirect fires planned to 
support R&S assets and 
recommends establishing 
appropriate restrictive fire 
support coordination measures 
to provide for troop safety. 

o The R&S asset commander 
is responsible for planning 
targets and indirect fires for 
that element. 

o The engineer officer 
supports the K&S effort by 
collecting information on the 
terrain and obstacles. 

o The IEWSE officer 
supports the R&S effort by 
guiding the MI battalion assets 
to assist in answering the PIR. 

o The ADA officer plans air 
defense for the R&S assets and 
also provides information on 
enemy air activity. 

o The NBC officer 
integrates NBC operations with 
R&S missions. 

o The aviation officer 
provides air movement for R&S 
assets and also information on 
enemy activity while in flight. 

o The ALO provides close 
air support for R&S missions as 
well as in-flight reports on 
enemy movement. 

These staff officers are 
not cast aside upon completion 
of the R&S plan. They should 



4-3 



FM 34-2-1 



be kept updated on the current 
R&S situation. These officers 
provide recommendations during 
R&S operations and ensure their 
assets are operating as 
instructed. 

The DST is a tool used in 
the IPB process that brings the 
staff officers together to plan 
the mission. The DST also 
ensures involvement among the 
S2, the S3, and the FSO in 
planning R&S missions. 

PLANNING 

Once you know which R&S 
assets are available to conduct 
R&S operations, you have to 
decide how to satisfy the SIR. 
To collect the greatest amount 
of intelligence with the fewest 
assets, you must know how to 
plan missions using basic 
collection management strategy 
such as augmenting, task 
organizing, cueing, and 
redundancy. 

AUGMENTING 



| Chapter 8] has an in-depth 
discussion of augmenting. 

TASK ORGANIZING 

To collect the most 
information, with the fewest 
assets and in the quickest way, 
task organize assets. This 
increases their overall 
effectiveness in gathering 
information and surviving on 
the battlefield. The following 
is an example of task 
organizing. 



A scout platoon's mission 
is to conduct a 10-kilometer- 
wide by 10-kilometer-deep zone 
reconnaissance before a 
movement to contact. The scout 
platoon must accomplish this 
mission in one hour. You have 
determined the platoon needs 
augmentation to cover this much 
area in the time allowed. 
After you coordinate with the 
S3, the S3 attaches two 
mechanized infantry squads to 
the scout platoon. These two 
squads are given the mission to 
provide security and mark 
infiltration routes. 

In this example the scout 
platoon is able to concentrate 
on reconnoitering the terrain 
and locating enemy positions; 
while the two mechanized squads 
provide security for the scout 
platoon and mark infiltration 
routes. If you had expected 
heavy enemy obstacles, the S3 
could have attached an engineer 
section to mark, breach, or 
provide obstacle assessment 
while the scouts and infantry 
did their mission. 

You should consider all the 
assets listed in Chapter 3 for 
augmentation or task organ iza- 
tion roles. See Chapter 8 for 
further discussion or task 
organization. 

CUEING 

Another collection strategy 
of R&S missions is cueing. 
Cueing is using limited assets 
to identify or verify enemy 
activity or using one asset to 



4-4 



FM 34-2-1 



tip off or alert another 
asset. Use the event template 
to pinpoint the times and areas 
to collect on the enemy. 

Instead of the R&S assets 
trying to cover large areas for 
extended periods or time, the 
assets are active only when 
cued. The cueing can be the 
time you expect the enemy to be 
at a specific NAI, or the 
reaction to information 
reported by another asset. An 
example of cueing follows: 

You have identified three 
NAI needing surveillance, while 
using only one asset. For this 
example the only asset 
available to cover the three 
NAI is an OP. Due to the 
distance between the NAI, the 
OP cannot cover all three NAI 
at the same time. You 
determine a location central to 
all three NAI. From this 
location the OP can cover only 
one NAI with surveillance. 

An aircraft reports enemy 
vehicles near one of the 
unsurveilled NAI. You inform 
the OP of the activity, thus 
cueing it; and the asset moves 
toward the NAI to verify the 
report. You may use an}r .of the 



as 



assets listed in [Chapter 3 
cues for other assets. 

REDUNDANCY 



Another collection strategy 
for R&S operations is 
redundancy. As the S2, your 

grimary effort is to provide 
&S coverage for as many NAI as 
possible. Based on the 



priority of the SIR and the 
number of NAI, you have to 
decide which areas you want 
more than one asset to cover. 
With more than one asset 
covering the same NAI, a backup 
system is available in case one 
asset breaks down. Redundancy 
guarantees continuous area 
coverage. An example of 
redundancy follows. 

You have a GSR covering an 
NAI during limited visibility. 
Just in case the GSR breaks 
down, you have assigned two 
OPs/LPs with NODS to cover the 
NAI. The OPs also provide NAI 
coverage during daylight while 
the GSK crew rests. If the GSR 
breaks down, the OPs have NODS 
to pick up the responsibility 
of surveilfine the NAI. The 
NODS can also specifically 
identify the moving intruders 
detected by the GSK. 

Remember to include in the 
R&S planning efforts 
coordination with the CI team 
supporting your unit. The 
routes used by your scout 
platoon and the positions 
operated by your assets will 
be potential NAI to enemy 
collection assets. Whatever 
OPSEC and deception measures 
you incorporate into the R&S 
plan, they should be based 
on CI evaluation of the 
vulnerability of your R&S 
assets to enemy collection 
and target acquisition 
capabilities. As you expect 
to see the enemy at certain 
times and places on the 
battlefield, so the enemy 
will expect to see you. 



4-5 



FM 34-2-1 

Working with the S3, you 
are now ready to begin matching 
assets with missions. If the 
commander and the S3 approve 
the R&S plan, then give warning 
orders to the assets. The 
warning orders allow the assets 
enough time to conduct troop- 
leading procedures. 

Once you issue the warning 
orders and. refined R&S plan, 
prepare your portion of the 



mission briefing. The purpose 
of this briefing is to inform 
the collection assets of their 
missions and to provide them 
with as much information as 
possible about it (such as IPB 
products). Use all available 
information to provide as clear 
a picture as possible of what 
you expect of them on the 
battlefield and what they can 
expect to encounter. 



4-6 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 5 

METHODS OF TASKING RECONNAISSANCE 
AND SURVEILLANCE ASSETS 



The S3 is responsible for 
and has tasking authority over 
maneuver elements. The S2 
makes tasking recommendations 
to the commander or S3. The S2 
is the primary user of the 
scouts and, many times, the S2 
actually tasks them. In some 
units the S2 has tasking 
authority over R&S assets after 
the commander and the S3 
approve the R&S plan. Every 
unit has its own 1SOP regarding 
R&S responsibilities. 

Normally, you can consider 
the commanders approval of the 
R&S plan as granting tasking 
authority. Many times the S3 
does not have time to prepare 
and publish separate R&S 
missions, so the S2 does it. 
Once the S2, after coordinating 
closely with the S3, has 
completed writing the formal 
plan, it is sent to the 
commander for approval. Once 
the commander signs the 
fragmentary order (FRAGO) or 
warning order, the taskings 
within it become missions 
ordered by the commander, 
regardless of who actually 
wrote it. 

Another way to publish the 
missions and taskings of the 
R&S plan is to print it in the 
subordinate unit instructions 
within the unit OPORD. While 



not as timely as FRAGOs or 
warning orders, unit 
instructions still let everyone 
know what you expect of them 
during the R&S operations. 



iFigure 5-l| shows a sample 
R&S tasking with subordinate 
unit instructions. Maneuver 
battalions can also use this 
method when it is tailored to 
their level. 

Probably the quickest way 
to issue R&S orders is to have 
the S3 issue them when issuing 
the warning order to the unit. 
This method ensures the tasked 
assets know it is a formal 
tasking coming from the 
commander. both the S2 and S3 
olan the R&S operation; 
however, the S3 continues to 
lave the responsibility of 
actually tasking assets. 

A formal method of tasking 
assets for R&S operations is an 
intelligence annex to the 
OPORD. The intelligence annex 
is a formal intelligence 
tasking document accompanying 
an OPORD or an operations plan 
(OPLAN). Paragraph 2, Priority 
Intelligence Requirements, and 
paragraph 3, Intelligence 
Acquisition Tasks, inform all 
assets what the focus of the 
R&S plan is and what mission 
each asset is to conduct. The 



5-1 



FM 34-2-1 



(Classification) 
* * * * * * * 

OPORD 19 3d Bde - 24th Armd Div. * * 
3 . Subordinate Unit Instructions 

b. TF 1-6: 

(1) Establish contact point 1 and assist passage of 
covering force elements through the FEBA. 

(2) Defend in sector from NT888777 to NT666555 NLT 
181500U JAN94. 

(3) Establish surveillance sites along Route TOM and 
HARRY to provide early warning of enemy flank attack NLT 181500U 
JAN94. 

(4) Send CR patrols along the FIBEL river and the 
DICKEL ridge line NLT 181600U JAN94 to confirm or deny the 
presence of enemy reconnaissance patrols. 

c. TF 1-68: 

(1) Establish contact point 2 and assist passage of 
covering force elements through the FEBA. 

(2) Defend in sector from NS666444 to NS333222 NLT 
181500U JAN94. 

(3) Establish screen along the east side of the NEILSON 
AQUADUCT NLT 181500U JAN94. Establish surveillance positions 
near the intersection of AUBOBAHN 67 and 4 to provide early 
warning of enemy reinforcements. 

(4) Send a CR patrol in the forests southeast of 
KIBBLESNBITS capable of destroying a reinforced BMP Company NLT 
181700U JAN94 to destroy enemy reconnaissance units. 

(Classification) 



Figure 5-1. Sample R&S tasking with subordinate unit instructions. 



5-2 



FM 34-2-1 



S2 is responsible for the 
intelligence annex. Again, 
before distribution, the S2 
coordinates the intelligence 
annex with the commander and S3 
for their approval. 



Figure 5-2 1 is a sample R&S 



tasking. Maneuver battalions 
can also use this method, but 
would tailor it to their level. 

The R&S tasking matrix is 
another metho d of tasking R&S 



assets. (See Appendix 
Distribution can be-- 



) 



o Directly to the tasked 
asset. 

o Attached to the 
subordinate unit instructions 
of the OPORD. 

o Attached to the 
intelligence annex. 

Once tasked, the assets 
must understand their mission. 
During the mission briefing for 
the assets, use as many of the 
IPB products as possible. Each 
product serves a particular 
purpose: 

o The modified combined 
obstacles overlay (MCOO) 
reveals terrain constraints. 

o Photographs show terrain 
features. 

o Enemy situation templates 
provide a picture of the 
enemy's location and probable 
COA. 

o Event templates indicate 
where and when the enemy can 



maneuver. 

o NAI on the event template 
show target locations. 

o The DST provides a 
picture of the overall friendly 
scheme of maneuver and warns 
the R&S assets of any friendly 
fires in their vicinity. 

Once the assets have an 
understanding of the enemy and 
terrain, they can receive 
detailed mission instructions. 
It does not matter if you or 
the S3 give this briefing, just 
as long as the assets 
understand their mission. If 
possible, the S2, S3, and FSO 
should be involved in this 
briefing. 

Each asset should 
understand what the commander 
wants it to accomplish. Give 
the assets the big picture, 
then direct them to their 
specific roles and how they are 
to support the overall mission. 

You can see the extensive 
time required to plan R&S 
operations. In most units 
there is not enough time to go 
into a lot of mission-specific 
detailed planning before the 
assets are deployed. R&S 
operations must begin as soon 
as possible after the unit 
receives the warning order or 
OPORD. If this is the case, 
assets can be sent out after 
you and the S3 have developed 
the rough draft R&S plan. 
Later, as you and the other 
staff officers refine the R&S 
plan, you can adjust the assets 
and their instructions. 



5-3 



FM 34-2-1 



(Classification) 
* * * * * * * 

ANNEX B (Intelligence) to OPORD 19... 

REFERENCES: Map sheets 

TIME ZONE: U 

3. Intelligence acquisition tasks. 

a. TF 1-6: 

(1) Establish surveillance sites along routes TOM and 
HARRY to provide early warning of enemy flank attack NLT 181500U 
JAN94. 

(2) Send CR patrols along the FIBEL river and the 
DICKEL ridge line NLT 181600U JAN94 to confirm or deny the 
presence of enemy recon elements. 

b. TF 1-68: 

(1) Establish screen along the east side of the NEILSON 
AQUADUCT NLT 181500U JAN94. Establish surveillance positions 
near the intersection of AUTOBAHN 67 and 4 to provide early 
warning of enemy reinforcements. 

(2) Send a CR patrol in the forests southeast of 
KIBBLESNBITS capable of destroying a reinforced BMP Company 
NLT 181700U JAN94. 



(Classification) 



Figure 5-2. Sample R&S tasking in the intelligence annex to the OPORD. 



5-4 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 6 
THE RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE OVERLAY 



The R&S overlay is the R&S 
plan in graphic form. The 
purpose of the R&S overlay is 
to show the assets and the key 
staff officers exactly where 
the R&S assets are operating. 
You will extract most of the 
overlay's graphics and symbols 
from FM 101-5-1. Additionally, 
due to the various R&S 
operational techniques, you 
will need to construct some 
"homemade'" graphics and explain 
them in the legend. 

There are two parts to the 
R&S overlay. The first part is 
the graphic display of deployed 
or planned deployment of R&S 
assets. The second part is the 
marginal data consisting of the 
legend, administrative data, 
specific instructions to each 
asset, and the distribution 
list. 

The marginal information 
found on the overlay consists 
of the standard wording found 
on all overlays. The 
administrative data is 
comprised of the following: 

o Classification. 

o Overlay title. 

o Registration marks. 

o Map sheet name. 



o Map sheet scale. 

o Map sheet number. 

o Map sheet series. 

o The "prepared by" line. 

Another portion of the 
administrative data is the 
legend. The legend contains 
any nonstandard FM 101-5-1 
graphics used. It also 
contains detailed written 
instructions to each R&S 
asset. These detailed 
instructions should focus on— 

o The required operational 
times. You should give each 
asset both a start and a finish 
time for each mission, as 
applicable. 

o The target. To answer 
the PIR, you need to look for 
specific indicators. Each 
asset should be told exactly 
what to look for (such as type 
units, equipment, and specific 
activity). Never give 
broad-based generic missions to 
"go out and look for and report 
on anything that moves." 
Specific guidance will promote 
specific answers. 

o Coordinating 
instructions. All assets will, 
at one time or another, move 



6-1 



FM 34-2-1 



through or near another unit's 
AO. To keep units from 
shooting friendly R&S assets, 
assets and units must 
coordinate with each other. 
It is also important that 
R&S assets coordinate among 
themselves. 

o Reporting requirements. 
All assets should know when, 
how often, and what format 
to use when reporting. You 
should provide frequencies, 
alternate frequencies, and 
reaction during jamming. You 
must also provide the NLT 
time for specific information 
to be reported. 

Initially, the locations 
for assets are areas in which 
you recommend they deploy. 
After the assets have gone 
to these areas (NAI), they 
report to you or the S3 the 
actual locations in which 
they can conduct their 
missions. You or the S3 
updates the graphics to 
snow actual locations. 

Control measures are as 
follows: 

o Friendly boundaries, R&S 
limit of responsibility, NAI, 
start points (SP), release 
points (RP), and checkpoints. 

o Graphics depicting route, 
area, and zone reconnaissance. 

o Primary, alternate, and 
supplementary positions. 



o Sectors of scan for 
sensors. 

All of these control 
measures, except R&S limit of 
responsibility, are found in 
FM 101-5-1. The R&S limit of 
responsibility comes down from 
higher headquarters along with 
other R&S guidance. This limit 
is a control measure that 
informs subordinate units of 
the limits of their R&S 
operations. It can be 
represented by a dashed line 

Remember, it is important 
to include detailed 
instructions for each R&S asset 
on the overlay. This method is 
known as the overlay method for 
distributing written 
instructions. Another method 
is known as the matrix method. 
The R&S tasking matrix is the 
matrix used for this method 



(See |Appendix A| .) |Figure 6-1 
shows an K&b tasking matrix. 



Figure 6-2| is an example of 



the R&S plan graphically 
portrayed on an overlay with 
detailed instructions to each 
asset written on the bottom of 
the overlay. Attach the R&S 
tasking matrix to the bottom 
of the R&S overlay. The matrix 
provides the following 
information: 

o The first column shows 
the priority of each mission. 
This number should correspond 
with the PIR number. 



6-2 



FM 34-2-1 



O 

Q. 
LU 

CE 



Q 
S 

o 
o 
o 



O K X UJ GC 
K UJ 3 CO < CO CO 



ococc 



SOEh<0C(0 



C0OO3HC0 



CD Z 

P o 

CO 



€0 

z 
o 

H 

o 

a 



5 

€0 




s 
o 

£ 

Q. 



c 
o 

■« 



o 



Figure 6-1. R&S tasking matrix. 



6-3 



FM 34-2-1 



02 



30- 



TF1-71 



R&S overlay 91-3 (Defense) 
Map sheet: AUSGABE 
Map sheet No: VII 



R&S LIMIT 



Map sheet series: M748 
Scale: 1:50,000 
Prepared by: CPT Polk 




INSTRUCTIONS 



SCOUTS: Establish forward screen NLT 1600 at coordinate 



^ w ~ ~ ■ - • i-«m»^ii*»ii iuiwoiu oviDDii uli iduu at coordinate 

Coordinate with B Co for route to screen position and GSR team. 



Target enemy recon (BRDM, BMP, tanks). 



REMBASS : Establish two strings vicinity 



and 



nfiltrating along forest trails. Coordinate passage with B Co, Scout platoon, and GSR team, 



NLT 1800. Target enemy dismount recon and MR troops 



GSR : Establish position A1 vicinity - 



NLT 1700. Target enemy recon (BDRM, BMP, tanks, dismounted troops). 



Coordinate with A Co for passage, Scout platoon, and REMBASS team. Establish position A2 on order. Coordinate with 

B Co for position. Establish position B1 vicinity NLT 1700. Target enemy recon. Coordinate with B Co for passage 

Scout platoon, and REMBASS team. Establish position B2 on order. Coordinate with C Co for position. 

PATROLS: A Co conduct recon and security patrols in Zone Duck. Begin patrols NLT 1830 and run them sporadically until 
0600, Target enemy dismounted troops, BMP, and BRDMs. Coordinate with GSR team and Scout platoon. C Co establish 
screen along southern flank NLT 1800. Target enemy recon, BMP, BRDM, tanks. Coordinate with Scout platoon 
and GSR team. 

OP/LP: Position as per battalion R&S SOP. 



REPORTS: Report on battalion intelligence net using SALUTE format. Patrol leaders report on intelligence net after each 
patrol. Report combat information on intelligence or operations net. Assets report using schedule in R&S SOP. 
React to jamming as per battalion TAC SOP. 

DISTRIBUTION: A, B, and C Companies, Scout platoon, GSR team, REMBASS team, S3, FSO, and brigade S2. 



Figure 6-2. R&S overlay with instructions on acetate. 



6-4 



FM 34-2-1 



o The next column provides 
the asset with the NAI number 
and grid coordinate. 

o The start/stop column 
informs the asset the times 
for this mission. 

o The SIR column explains 
to the assets exactly what 
they are looking for (target). 

o The next set of columns 
lists the actual assets tasked 
to conduct each mission. An 
"X" placed under each asset 
identifies the tasking. 

o The coordination column 
tells the assets which units 
to coordinate with for this 
mission. 

o The last column provides 
the assets with reporting 
requirements. 

We have discussed two 
ways to distribute 
instructions; however, the 
method is not important. 
What is important is for 



assets to receive clear, 
specific instructions. 

Disseminating the R&S 
plan to all the assets can 
be a problem. When the R&S 
plan reaches the dissemination 
phase, the assets are usually 
scattered ereat distances 
over the "battlefield. In 
some instances the R&S plan 
is disseminated by courier. 
To ensure all assets receive 
their copy, write each asset's 
title directly on the 
distribution list, plan, 
or overlay. Exchanging 
brigade or battalion R&S 
plans with adjacent units 
ensures proper coordination, 
minimizes the risk of 
shooting friendly soldiers, 
and cuts out unnecessary 
redundancy. 



Chapter 5| provides 
additional methods for 
disseminating R&S 
requirements. See FM 34-80, 
Appendix E, for another sample 
R&S overlay. 



6-5 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 7 



MONITORING THE RECONNAISSANCE 
AND SURVEILLANCE EFFORT 



During the battle, your 
commander will probably have 
several PIR that need to be 
answered. As the S2, you will 
weigh those PIR in some way to 
organize your collection 
effort. Remember the first 
principle of R&S: tell 
commanders what they need to 
know in time for them to act. 

This principle implies 
that, as the S2, you must 
monitor your collection effort 
at all times so you can make 
sure you answer your 
commander's PIR. 

If your commander develops 
new PlK during the battle, you 
may have to modify your R&S 
plan to address the new PIR. 
Suppose a PIR becomes obsolete. 
For example, let's say your 
commander was very concerned 
about enemy reconnaissance 
locations. This PIR would be 
valid as your unit prepared to 
cross the LD/LC. However, once 
your unit consolidates on its 
objective, this particular PIR 
would be less important. The 
point is, you should constantly 
monitor the status of your R&S 
effort so you will know when to 
update PIR or to modify your 
R&S plan. 

TRACKING TARGETS 
AND ASSETS 

There are other reasons you 
must monitor your R&S or 
collection plan. Remember the 



term "high payoff target," or 
HPT? These are specific enemy 
weapon systems or specific 
enemy units that are identified 
which must be destroyed, 
degraded, or suppressed for 
your unit to succeed in its 
mission. Many times, locating 
an HPT may be one of your 
commander's PIR. Other times, 
it might be an IR. In either 
case, your R&S plan must 
account for HPTs. During the 
execution of your R&S plan, you 
must be able to identify HPTs 
and quickly forward their 
location to the S3 and FSO for 
action. This is especially 
critical for CR operations. 

Another reason for 
monitoring your R&S operation 
is to keep track of your asset 
status and location. You will 
need to know which of your 
assets are still mission 
capable and which are 
inoperative, so you will not 
waste time retasKing inoperable 
assets. Obviously, if you need 
to retask assets from one 
location to another, you need 
to know where those assets are. 

One technique to keep track 
of your assets is to have them 
report in at predetermined 
intervals based on METT-T, 
criticality of the area covered 
by the asset, or communications 
available. You can even show 
this graphically by using TPLs 
for moving assets. 



7-1 



FM 34-2-1 

For example, let us say you 
have given your scouts the 
mission of route 
reconnaissance. On your event 
template, you have developed a 
series of TPLs depicting 
15-minute increments. As your 
scouts cross a TPL, they report 
in to you. In this way, you 
can easily monitor where your 
scouts are on the battlefield. 
(Instead of TPLs, you can use 
existing friendly control 
graphics as well.) 

If you lose contact with 
your scouts, you at least have 
an approximate idea of where 
they last were. When you use 
TPLs, try to have recognizable 
features r epresent them. 
Figure 7-1 is an example of 
this technique. 

EVALUATING HOW YOUR 
ASSETS REPORT 

You should monitor your 
R&S plan to evaluate how well 
your assets are reporting 
information back to you. If 
your assets are not reporting 
quickly enough, accurately 
enough, or reporting the wrong 
information, you will need to 
make corrections. 

At the brigade and 
battalion levels, many times 
you will find your assets may 
not always provide you with 
timely or complete information. 
There are many reasons for 
this. Most of the time it is 
difficult to discern what is 



happening on the battlefield. 
The company commander or 
platoon leader is preoccupied 
with fighting and winning the 
battle. 

Nevertheless, do not accept 
incomplete information! If a 
spot report lacks the type of 
vehicle, number of vehicles, or 
direction of movement, get back 
on the radio and ask for it. 
If your scouts send back a 
report that does not make sense 
to you, ask for clarification. 
If you have not heard from your 
ground surveillance radars for 
an unusually long time, call 
them and ask for a situation 
report. 

You should enforce negative 
situation reports at 
predetermined intervals. Too 
many times in the past, S2s 
thought no news was good news. 
They were content to sit in 
their vehicles in silence. Be 
aggressive ! Remember, you are 
trying to answer your 
commander's questions. You 
cannot, and commanders cannot 
do their jobs, unless incoming 
information is timely, 
accurate, and complete. 
Nevertheless, you must be 
realistic. 

There is much confusion in 
battle, and some information 
will not be attainable. You 
cannot tie up the radio nets 
trying to get "perfect" 
reports. Some information you 
will have to live without. 



7-2 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 7-1. Time phase line control. 



7-3 



FM 34-2-1 



The reporting criteria you 
have specified in your 
intelligence annex or on your 
R&S overlay will tell your 
assets how and when they are to 
report. As you monitor your 
R&S operation, you should 
evaluate two things: 

o Are my R&S assets 
reporting per my published 
reporting criteria? 

o Are my published 
reporting criteria adequate to 
provide the specific 
information used to answer my 
commanders PIR? 

NOTE : Sometimes reports using 
only size, activity, location, 
and time (SALT) will be more 
feasible and timely than the 
full size, activity, location, 
unit, time, equipment (SALUTE) 
report. 

If your assets are not 
reporting per your criteria, 
it is simple to correct the 
asset; your S3 can help with 
this. However, you should 
continually assess whether or 
not your reporting criteria 
are sufficient to give you 
answers to your commander's 
questions. 

If your assets are 
reporting per your criteria 
and you are not getting the 
detailed information you need, 
you should consider modifying 
your reporting criteria. 

For example, let us suppose 
you wanted A Company to report 
enemy motorized rifle units by 
number and type of vehicles 



and their location. Later, 
however, you discover that 
in order to answer your 
commander's PIR, you must 
calculate the enemy rate of 
advance. You should modify 
A Company's reporting criteria 
to include speed and direction 
of movement. 

Remember a good R&S 
collection plan tells the 
commander what he or she needs 
to know in time for the 
commander to act. Therefore, 
assets must report information 
to you quickly so you can 
process and relay it to the 
commander, S3, or FSO. It 
does no good to report an enemy 
counterattack 30 minutes after 
the fact. As the S2, you need 
to enforce timely reporting of 
information. 

Here again, the commander 
and/or the S3 can help. 
Remember, be aggressive! The 
S2 must also inform the 
commander when information on 
the PIR cannot be collected or 
if the R&S assets have been 
destroyed. 

MANAGING PRIORITY 
INTELLIGENCE REQUIREMENTS 

Now that you have evaluated 
reporting, assume that you have 
been able to answer your 
commander's first PIK. The 
next logical step is for you 
to focus your R&S effort on 
answering the commander's 
second highest PIR, then the 
third, fourth, and so on. 
Realistically, your R&S plan 
will probably address more 
than one PIR simultaneously. 



7-4 



FM 34-2-1 



The point for you to remember 
is that R&S does not stop. 
Once you have satisfied a 
requirement, shift your 
attention to the next 
highest priority. 

Many times you may have 
answered a PIR out of 
sequence. For example, you 
may be able to answer PIK 2 
and 3 although you still 
have not been able to collect 
enough information to answer 
PIR 1. Or you may find the 
battlefield situation has 
changed so drastically your 
PIR 1 is no longer a valid 
concern. 

These cases prove you must 
continually reevaluate the 
priority of your commander 5 
PIR. If you have answered PIR 
2 and 3, does PIR 4 become your 
second priority? If PIR 1 is 
no longer a valid concern, does 
PIR 2 become your top priority? 
You must support your 
commander. Knowing and 
understanding your commander's 
intent will nelp you reevaluate 
priorities and anticipate 
possible changes, as will a 
solid relationship with your 
commander and S3. 

One useful technique that 
will aid you in managing PIR 
priorities is to "time phase" 
your commander's PIR based on 
now you anticipate events on 
the battlefield. Essentially, 
you tie each PIR to a phase in 
the battle through use of the 
DST. 

Normally, each PIR has a 
time relative to a point in the 
battle when answering it will 



be important, and another time 
when the PIR will no longer be 
a valid concern. For example, 
let us suppose your unit's 
mission is to attack. 
Initially, the most important 
thing your commander might need 
to know is the location of 
enemy reconnaissance and 
security zone units. 

However, after a certain 
point in the attack (after you 
nave penetrated the security 
zone) , this question becomes 
meaningless. Now, the most 
important thing might be to 
locate the enemy's main 
defensive area. Once you have 
consolidated on the objective, 
the most important thing might 
be locating any possible enemy 
counterattack. Therefore, 
before the attack, your 
commander's PIR might look 
like this: 

o PIR 1: What are the 
locations of the 34th motorized 
rifle regiment (MRR) 
reconnaissance and platoon 
strong points in the security 
zone? 

o PIR 2: What are the 
locations of the 34th MRR's 
MRC and AT positions within 
the main defensive area? 

o PIR 3: What is the 
location of the 4th Tank 
Battalion (TB) (-) of the 
34th MRR? 

Once you have reached your 
intermediate objective, you 
might change your commander's 
PIK priorities to look like 
this: 



7-5 



FM 34-2-1 



° PIR 1: What are the 
locations of the 34th MRR's 
MRC and AT positions within 
the main defensive area? 

o PIR 2: What is the 
location of the 4th TB (-) 
of the 34th MRR? 

o PIR 3: What are the 
locations of the 34th MRR's 
reconnaissance and platoon 
strong points in the security 
zone? 

In fact, you might delete 
PIR 3 altogether. Later, as 
you consolidate on your 
subsequent objective, you may 
reprioritize like this: 

o PIR 1: What is the 
location of the 4th TB (-) 
of the 34th MRR? 

o PIR 2: What are the 
locations of the 34th MRR's 
MRC and AT positions within 
the main defensive area? 

Since PIR relate to events 
on the battlefield, you can 
anticipate them by war gaming; 
and enter these changes onto 
the intelligence BOS of your 
unit's DST! iFigure 7-2\ shows 
the process of time phasing 
PIR. 

MODIFYING THE RECONNAISSANCE 
AND SURVEILLANCE PLAN 

Whether modifying reporting 
requirements because of new 
reporting criteria or because 
of new or modified PIR, you 
must be ready to change your 
R&S plan to fit the commanders 
needs. Basically, you will 
have to decide— 



Where you want your 
R&S assets to shift their 
attention. 

o Where you want those 
assets to actually move. 

o What you want your assets 
to look for. 

o How you want your assets 
to report. 

Here is where doing your 
homework (IPB) ahead of time 
comes in handy. If most or 
all of your IPb products were 
prepared ahead of time, all 
you need do is review and 
update those products as 
necessary. 

Looking at your updated 
situation templates and event 
templates will give you a good 
idea of where to shift your R&S 
focus , and what you should 
expect to see. Your updated 
terrain and weather products 
will tell you where to place 
your assets. 

However, if you have not 
been able to update or produce 
situation and event templates, 
or you have advanced past your 
AI, you still need to mentally 
envision what you think the 
enemy will Iook like on the 
terrain, applying the effects 
of weather. Your mental 
picture will help you quickly 
come up with NAJ and TPLs. 

The next step is to retask 
your R&S assets. Remember, 
when you shift your R&S assets, 
their vulnerability to enemy 
collection and target 



7-6 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 7-2. Time phasing PIR. 



7-7 



FM 34-2-1 



acquisition capabilities may 
change. 

TASKING ASSETS 



IChapter 5 described many 
ways ot tasking assets, 
including using a matrix 
format. A matrix is easy to 
use and can be quickly 



modified. Figure 7-3 



is an 



example of a modified matrix. 

Each column has a letter 
designator. For example, the 
Priority column is "A," the NAI 
column is "B," and so on. The 
lettering makes it easy to 
quickly assign a new R&S 
mission, or modify an existing 
mission. All you need do is 
transmit pertinent information 
within each column. For 
example: 

o Column B - 4. 

o Column C - 1800 to 2000. 

o Column D - BRDM, BMP, 
platoon-size (three vehicles) 
with possible tanks. 

o Column L - Action. 



o Column N 
with ECHO. 



Coordinate 



o Column O - Report by type 
(light and heavy wheeled and 
tracked), number of vehicles, 
location, speed, and direction 
of movement. 

You have told the attached 
GSR team to monitor NAI 4 from 
1800 to 2000. They should 
expect to see BRDM or BMP 



vehicles (possibly reinforced 
with tanks) up to platoon size 
(three vehicles). You have 
also told the GSR team they 
must coordinate with A Company, 
and should report targets by 
type (light or heavy wheeled 
and light or heavy tracked) and 
number of vehicles, location, 
speed, and direction of 
movement. 



Figure 7-4| shows a similar 
R&S tasking matrix with its 
horizontal lines numbered and 
its vertical columns identified 
by letters. Use this system if 
you wish to modify only one 
specific asset tasking on the 
matrix. For example: 



o Line 3C 



8. 



o Line 3D - AB434160. 

o Line 3E - Refer to 7E. 

In this example, you have 
just told Task Force 1-10 to 
establish an OP at an NAI. 
The OP is to observe an 
alternate position for an 
MRC at NAI 8. You updated 
the mission of one asset 



without reconstructing the 
entire matrix. 

These are just two examples 
of a technique you can use to 
quickly retask your deployed 
K&S assets. There are many 
more. The key is to establish 
a standard to quickly and 
easily modify your R&S plan 
based on your commanders 
changing needs. 



7-8 



FM 34-2-1 



2 

LU 
CC 



a. 
O 

CO 

59 

CC 

C 
-Q 

i_ 
CD 
CL 



§6 



a^ 



CO 

IS 
2° 

6 o 

Re 
£2 



' Q) C 

■o 2 •*= 

S £ ® 

o a> E 

CO .C Q) 

CM X ±* 

o O CO 




■o 

c 

03 

a. 
O 

CO 

59 

cc 

c 

.Q 

u. 
CD 
0. 



0. 

O 

CO 

I 

o 

03 



■o 

c 

03 
0. 

O 

CO 

59 

CC 

C 
.Q 



0. 

O 

CO 

03 
O 



CL 2 



■o 

c 

03 
CL 
O 
CO 

59 

CC 

C 
.Q 



CL 3 



CL 
O 
CO 

8 



z 
o 

$ 

z 

a 
cc 
o 
o 
a 



JB -a 

O w — 

° ai w 

CO CD 



E 

(0 

a> 

1 





J§8 

CD 2 Q) O 
m o c 

03 U- o CQ 



c 
o 
o . 

is 



c 

8 . 

is 

o CO 
w(5 

Si 



8 



oCO 



OC UJ 2 CD < CO CO 



O CO oc 



5 O CC H < CC CO 



CO O O D H CO 



UJ O 



cS 



o 



«a 



■ 3 



UJ 



<3 



to 

z 
o 

g 

D 

I 

Z 



CO 




coo 

Si ° c c 

.a g-o E 

o c q. o 
IOW E 



a> 

E 

! 

0) <j) 
^^ 

_ c 

_ © 03 

« 03 2 

CO 
©2-2 

03 CO O 

co lu a 



> £ 
EH 



CO sz 
03 W 



= .c-o= 2 
I .£ co > c5 




Q) 

(JO)' „ 



£>o 8 5 

•- « n E 

o«o.E 

Hi 




s 

CO 



CO 



CO 



o o o 



m 



i- CM CO 



CM CO 



CM CO 



CO 



in 



AlldOIdd 



CM 



CM 



CO 



Figure 7-3. Example of a modified matrix. 



7-9 



FM 34-2-1 





A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 




UNIT TASKING 


PRIORITY 


NAI 


LOCATION 


REPORTING REQUIREMENT 
EVENT OR INDICATOR 


REMARKS 


1 


TASK FORCE 
1-10 


1 




See R&S 
overlay 


Conditions that affect trafficability 
and maneuverability. 
Obstacles: Type, size, and 
orientation. 


Report as 
obtained. 


Recon axis 
speed. 


2 


Recon. 




2 

2A 


AB474155 
AB466136 


2 to 3 x BMP2's, 1 x T45B; 
possible obstacle (single strand 
wire concertina). 


Possible combat 
security outpost. 
Report NLT 
010100ZSEPXX. 


3 


Establish OP. 




6A 


AB427185 


Surveillance of activities on OBJ 
CAT 


Establish position 
NLT 312200Z. 
AUGXX. 


4 


Recon. 




4 

4B 

4A 


AB453165 
AB430145 
AB453138 


3 x MRP's with 7 to 8 x BMP2's, 
2 to 3 x T64B's in prepared 
positions. Main obstacle array 
is from 800 to 1,000 m forward 
of MRC position. 


Report all fighting 
positions. 
Report obstacle 
type, size, and 
orientation NLT 
101200Z SEPXX. 


5 


Recon. 




6 


AB434160 


2 to 3 x AT5(BRDM) systems or 
2 to 3 x T64Bs. 


Possible MRB 
reserve. Report 
as obtained. 


6 


Recon. 




8 


AB410158 


3 x MRP's with 7 to 8 x BMP2's 
in prepared fighting positions. 

Obstacle array 800 to 1,000 m 
forward of MRC positions. 


Report all fighting 
positions. 

Report obstacle 
type, size, and 
orientation NLT 
01 1200Z SEPXX. 


7 






8A 


AB450103 


Alternate position for MRC at 
NAI 8. 





Figure 7-4. Modifying an R&S matrix. 



7-10 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 8 



AUGMENTING OR TASK ORGANIZING 
RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE MISSIONS 



Data gathered from 
different training exercises 
and the training centers 
indicate maneuver battalions 
typically overuse the scouts. 
Very often the scout platoon is 
the only R&S asset actively 
collecting on the battlefield. 
This usually results in a dead 
scout platoon, and many 
unanswered PIR. To increase 
the effectiveness of the scout 
platoon, other R&S assets, and 
the overall collection 
capability, you should augment 
or task organize as many K&S 
missions as possible. 

Augmenting and task 
organizing are two different 
concepts that strive for the 
same end result. In this field 
manual, the term "augmenting" 
is used to describe using 
numerous assets at the same 
time to support the R&S plan. 
You task with independent or 
dual R&S missions to augment 
the R&S effort; units are not 
augmented. 

There are circumstances in 
which you do not want to place 
R&S assets under C 2 of some 
of your subordinate units; you 
or the S3 want to maintain 
control of these assets to task 
or move them quickly without 
disrupting the other units. 

There may be times when 
you or the S3 want R&S assets 



under the C 2 of subordinate 
units. Both of these 
concepts --augmenting and task 
organizing— can be used to 
implement productive R&S plans. 
The following examples provide 
augmented or task organized R&S 
missions and what each 
accomplishes. 

TASK ORGANIZED WITH ENGINEERS 
AND ARTILLERY FORWARD 
OBSERVERS ATTACHED TO 

RECONNAISSANCE PATROL 

In this example you want to 
deny or confirm enemy activity 
at NAI 1 and to check on 
obstacles and booby traps along 
the road. You also want to see 
if the enemy has begun to 
prepare a possible fording site 
at NAI 2. Based on key 
intelligence you have provided, 
the S3 decides to send a 
mounted patrol for this 
mission. To increase mission 
effectiveness, the S3 also 
attaches some e ngineers and 



artillery FOs. IFigure 8-1 



is a 



sample R&S task organization 
with engineers and artillery 
FOs attached to reconnaissance 
patrol. 

The engineers will be able 
to inform you of tampered-with 
obstacles and adjusted roadside 
booby traps. The FOs will be 
able to call for indirect fire 
if the patrol finds any 
prepared fording or bridging 



8-1 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 8-1. Sample R&S task organization with engineers and 
artillery FOs attached to reconnaissance patrol. 



sites along the river. In this 
example you have three 
elements, each complementing 
the overall effectiveness of 
the reconnaissance mission. 
The reconnaissance element must 
receive instructions to clear, 
mark, breach, and/or bypass 
instructions before mission 
execution. 

TASK ORGANIZED WITH SIGNAL 

ASSETS, OBSERVATION POST, 

AND FORWARD OBSERVERS 

ATTACHED TO EXTENDED 

RECONNAISSANCE PATROL 



Figure 8-2| is a sample task 



organization with signal 
assets, OPs, and FOs attached 



to extended reconnaissance 
patrol. In this example you 
nave a reconnaissance patrol 
conducting a zone 
reconnaissance in Zone Buck. 
Due to the extended range of 
the patrol and the terrain, 
radio communications will not 
reach from Zone Buck to the 
TOC. You also have two NAI, 4 
and 7, needing surveillance 
during a particular time 
window. NAI 4 is a high speed 
avenue of approach exiting the 
battalion to the north. AI and 
NAI 7 is a road intersection. 
To augment this patrol you have 
a signal retransmission 
element, OP, and artillery FOs 
attached to the patrol. 



8-2 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 8-2. Sample R&S task organization with signal assets, 
and FOs attached to extended reconnaissance patrol. 



The retransmission element 
enables the reconnaissance 
patrol to report what is in 
Zone Buck; the OP and FO enable 
you to have surveillance of the 
NAI; and the FO allows you to 
interdict any targets moving 
along the NAI or the roads. 

SCOUTS WITH INFANTRY 

In this example your 
battalion is preparing to 
conduct a raid on Objective 
Bear. The terrain along the 
river consists of thick 
forests. You only have two 
hours to reconnoiter from the 
LD to the objective and to mark 
infiltration routes. You and 
the S3 decide to task organize 
this mission with the scout 
platoon and two infantry 



platoons. |FJgure 8-3| is a 
sample of R&S task organiza- 
tion with scout and infantry 
platoons. 

The scout platoon leader 
is the reconnaissance commander 
for this particular mission. 
The battalion has cross-trained 

one of the infantry platoons as 
the backup scout platoon. The 
scout platoon and the backup 
platoon mark crossing sites and 
infiltration routes while the 
other infantry platoon provides 
security. Once the scout 
platoon has marked the routes, 
they dismount and reconnoiter 
Objective Bear while the two 
infantry platoons provide 
security. 



8-3 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 8-3. Sample of R&S task organization with scout and infantry platoons. 



D COMPANY, SCOUT PLATOON, 

AND GROUND SURVEILLANCE 

RADAR EFFORT AUGMENTED 



Figure 8-4 



is a sample 
of an augmented R&S platoon 
mission. In this example your 
battalion is in the defense and 
has tasked Company D to conduct 
a route reconnaissance and 
provide surveillance of NAI 3 
tor four hours. The scout 



platoon is conducting a screen 
in the north. Two GSRs are 
providing surveillance of the 
tlanks. Each asset is 
conducting an independent R&S 
effort. This particular 
mission concept allows you or 
the S3 to move or assign 
additional missions to these 
assets with minimal disruption 
to the entire battalion. 



8-4 



FM 34-2-1 



TF 2-1 




NOTE: On some missions you may 
substitute OPs with GSRs. 



Figure 8-4. Sample augmented with D Company, 
Scout Platoon, and GSRs. 



8-5 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 9 

RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE 
INOFFENSIVE OPERATIONS 



Planning R&S missions in 
offensive operations requires 
close coordination between the 
S2, S3, FSO, and ALO. The 
chance of fratricide multiplies 
during these operations. The 
reason is R&S assets are 
usually conducting missions as 
the friendly units maneuver 
through these areas and engage 
possible enemy targets with 
direct or indirect fires. 

Detailed reconnaissance 
is the initial requirement 
for offensive operations. 
Due to the limited time 
available to conduct detailed 
reconnaissance, it is 
imperative you use, with 
augmentation, all available 
reconnaissance assets. 
Recent training exercises 
reveal that many times S2s 
do not construct complete 
R&S plans for offensive 
operations. To make sure 
you construct complete R&S 
plans, consider three general 
areas when planning for 
offensive operations: 

o Detailed reconnaissance. 

o Surveillance of the 
objective. 

o Ongoing R&S planning. 

DETAILED RECONNAISSANCE 

The first area of planning 
consideration stresses a 



detailed reconnaissance from 
the LD/LC to beyond the 
objective. During this phase 
you need to plan missions which 
answer the PIR and provide the 
commander and S3 with detailed 
information about the terrain 
and enemy that lie between them 
and the objective. 

You should have assets 
first complete those missions 
designed to provide specific 
information that will answer 
PIR, so gathered information 
can reach the TOC in time for 
the commander and the S3 to 
make any changes to COAs or to 
finalize the OFORD. There are 
basically two areas in which to 
conduct this detailed 
reconnaissance: along the 
friendly AAs and at the 
objective. 

RECONNAISSANCE ALONG THE 
AVENUES OF APPROACH 

Typical reconnaissance 
missions along the AA are to— 

o Detect, pinpoint, 
classify, and report location, 
dimension, and type of all 
obstacles (constructed or 
natural). 

o Detect gaps or bypasses 
of obstacles. 

o Provide surveillance 
and security of marks, gaps, 
breaches, and bypasses of 
obstacles. 



9-1 



FM 34-2-1 



o Report trafficability 
along AA. 



AA. 



o Establish OPs overlooking 



o Reconnoiter terrain and 
suspected enemy locations 
capable of overmatching and 
placing effective fire on the 

o Detect locations and 
strength of enemy R&S assets 
along the AA. 

RECONNAISSANCE OF THE 
OBJECTIVE 

Typical reconnaissance 
missions in the area of the 
objective are-- 

o Pinpoint fighting 
positions. Provide strength, 
weapon orientations, and 
description of fighting 
positions. 

o Detect obstacles 
and prepare to mark. 
Detect breaches, gaps, 
and bypasses. 

o Reconnoiter area around 
the objective (area depends 
on METT-T) to detect possible 
reinforcements or counterattack 
elements. 

o Establish OPs to maintain 
surveillance of the objective. 

As reconnaissance assets 
conduct these missions, you 
must ensure security, 
surveillance, and CR assets 



are providing coverage to the 
maneuver elements while they 
are preparing for this 
offensive operation. It 
appears to be two distinct 
R&S missions taking place at 
the same time. The first 
mission is providing support 
to the units that are preparing 
for the offensive OPORD. The 
second mission conducts R&S 
to answer PIR concerning the 
actual offensive operation. 

SURVEILLANCE OF THE 
OBTECTIVE 

Now it is time to focus 
on the second area of planning 
consideration which stresses 
surveillance. Surveillance 
focuses on— 

o The objective. 

o Terrain along the 
friendly avenue of approach 

(AA). 

o Possible enemy 
reinforcement routes. 

During this phase, you 
must make sure the S3 and 
all maneuver elements know 
the locations of surveillance 
assets. 

Surveillance of the 
objective should detect any 
changes while the friendly 
elements are maneuvering 
forward. The surveillance 
assets report any enemy 
leaving or entering the 
objective area. 



9-2 



FM 34-2-1 



Any terrain that can 
control the friendly AA 
should be covered with 
surveillance or controlled 
by one of the seven BOS 
listed at the bottom of the 
DST. 

Any routes leading into 
the friendly AA or the 
objective should be covered 
with surveillance to provide 
early warning of an enemy 
counterattack or reinforcements 
approaching. Again, these 
surveillance operations occur 
while the friendly elements 
are maneuvering toward the 
objective. 

ONGOING RECONNAISSANCE AND 
SURVEILLANCE PLANNING 

The third area of planning 
consideration focuses on both 
R&S missions. This area 
concerns planning R&S missions 
once your unit takes the 
objective. The S3 can now task 
subsequent R&S missions to 
those assets which provided 
surveillance to the maneuver 
elements. These R&S missions 
depend on the type of follow-on 
missions planned.. 

If the unit's mission is 
to reconsolidate and prepare 
to continue the attack to a 
subsequent objective, you 
should have a plan to continue 
R&S activities forward to the 
next objective. Remember, 
planning is continuous. After 
you accomplish this, your unit 
can implement missions 
discussed in supporting the 



second and third areas of 
planning considerations. A 
key scout mission is 
maintaining visual contact 
with the enemy. 

If the unit's mission is 
to occupy and defend the 
objective, you should recommend 
an R&S plan stressing early 
warning and CR operations. 

If the unit's mission is to 
pursue the fleeing enemy, you 
could recommend that scout 
elements provide flank security 
as other maneuver elements 
conduct guard operations. 

The most important aspect 
of the final planning 
consideration is that it be 

Planned out well in advance, 
his ensures the assets are 
prepared to execute the 
mission, not reorganizing the 
objective. 

The three areas of planning 
considerations previously 
stated work particularly well 
in a deliberate attack. You 
can apply these same principles 
for a movement to contact. 

Do not be misled into thinking 
these three areas of planning 
considerations take place 
independent of each other 
at different times. On the 
contrary, many times these 
missions overlap. 

We have shown you a 
technique for constructing 
complete R&S plans in 
off ensive ope rations. Refer 
to iChapter 121 for examples. 



9-3 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 10 



INTELLIGENCE SUPPORT 
TO COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE 



The S3 is in charge of 
the CR mission. However, 
the S2 plays a critical role 
in developing the battlefield 
situation in enough detail 
to allow the S3 to target, 
destroy, or suppress the 
enemy s R&S assets. 

STAFF OFFICERS 

A number of staff officers 
participate in CR planning and 
execution. Essentially, you 
must find the enemy's 
reconnaissance units before 
they can find and report back 
on friendly unit locations. 
You must process information 
quickly and pass targeting 
data to the S3 and the FSO. 
Those staff officers involved 
in CR planning and execution 
are discussed oelow. 

INTELLIGENCE OFFICER 

The S2 must be 
knowledgeable about the enemy, 
weather, and terrain. Using 
this knowledge, the S2— 

o Identifies enemy 
reconnaissance HVTs. 

o Recommends engagement 
areas and ambush sites 
(TAI). 

o Recommends HPTs. 



o Makes sure electronic 
warfare support measures (ESM) 
support any planned use or EW 
against enemy reconnaissance 
elements. 

o Develops an R&S plan to 
find enemy reconnaissance well 
forward. 

o Evaluates vulnerability 
of R&S assets to enemy R&S 
and target acquisition 
capabilities. 

OPERATIONS AND TRAINING 
OFFICER 

The S3- 

o Integrates fire, 
maneuver, obscurants, and EW 
to destroy or suppress enemy 
reconnaissance. 

o Task-organizes the unit 
to defeat enemy reconnaissance 
well forward. 

o Plans use of EW to 
suppress enemy reconnaissance. 

o Determines and plans for 
use of engagement areas and 
ambush sites (TAI). 

o Determines HPT based 
on the commander's intent 
and input from the S2 and 
the FSO. 



10-1 



FM 34-2-1 



o Develops deception 
plans to deceive enemy 
reconnaissance. 

o Develops, executes, 
and monitors the unit OPSEC 
program. 

o Uses targeting data 
from the S2. 

FIRE SUPPORT OFFICER 

The FSO-- 

o Plans and coordinates all 
indirect lethal and nonlethal 
means to destroy or suppress 
enemy reconnaissance. 

o Provides appropriate fire 
support coordination measures 
to protect the R&S participants 
(such as no fire areas or 
restricted fire areas). 

o Uses targeting data 
based on FOS and organic or 
supporting target acquisition 
radars. 

o With the S2, recommends 
HPTs and TAI. 

o Needs targeting data from 
the S2 and also specific 
weather and terrain data 
for targeting and weapon 
emplacement. 

IEWSE OFFICER 

The IEWSE officer- 



o Recommends the use of MI 
battalion assets, if attached 
or in DS. 

o Informs the commander, 
S2, and S3 of the status and 
location of MI battalion assets 
within the unit's AO. 

o Acts as liaison between 
the maneuver unit and the MI 
battalion S3. 

o Provides expertise on EW 
planning and use. 

o Receives priorities from 
the S3 and ESM priorities from 
the S2. 

AIR DEFENSE ARTILLERY 
OFFICER 

The ADA officer- 

o Provides early warning 
of enemy fixed-wing attack 
aircraft and rotary-wing 
aircraft. 

o Plans for and provides 
air defense coverage of 
friendly units well forward. 

o Recommends the use of ADA 
assets. 

o Needs information on the 
terrain and weather from the S2 
to place assets. 

o Receives information on 
the air threat from the S2. 



10-2 



FM 34-2-1 



o Needs ADA priorities and 
weapons status from the S3. 

ENGINEER OFFICER 

The engineer officer-- 

o Recommends the placement 
and types of obstacles to stop 
or slow down enemy 
reconnaissance. 

o Provides the S2 with 
information on the state of 
the terrain and enemy special 
reconnaissance activities. 

o Receives information on 
the terrain, weather, and enemy 
from the S2. 

o Needs engineer priorities 
and the unit scheme of maneuver 
from the S3. 

CHEMICAL OFFICER 

The chemical officer-- 

o Monitors contaminated 
areas. 

o Plans the use of 
obscurants to suppress enemy 
reconnaissance. 

o Provides expertise on 
areas of likely enemy NBC use. 



to best engage enemy 
reconnaissance units. You 
also recommend which enemy 
reconnaissance elements are 
the most important for your 
unit to destroy or suppress 
(such as HPTs). This implies 
close coordination and 
synchronization among the S2, 
IEWSE, S3, FSO, and the rest 
of the staff. 

MISSION PLANNING 

To plan the CR mission, you 
should know something about 
how terrain and weather will 
affect reconnaissance 
operations. You should also 
know threat reconnaissance 
operations, equipment, 
doctrine, ana tactics. 
Remember, seek the assistance 
of your CI team when evaluating 
enemy capabilities. 

Each threat division and 
regiment has organic ground 
reconnaissance units. These 
units either confirm 
information from other systems 
or develop their own 
information. They gather 
information primarily by 
patrolling and avoiding 
contact. Reconnaissance units 
may conduct raids or ambushes 
to gather i nformation. 



Figure 10-1 



o Receives precise weather reconnaissa nce assets. 



data. 

Several primary and special 
staff officers can provide you 
with information; however, they 
also require information from 
you . Remember, you are an 
integral part of the targeting 
process. You recommend where 



Figure 10-2 



shows division 



shows regimental 



reconnaissance assets. 

Reconnaissance patrols will 
usually be reinforced with 
tanks or additional armored 
personnel carriers (APCs) from 
the lead units. In addition, 
the lead battalions may use 



10-3 



FM 34-2-1 



RECONNAISSANCE 
llBATTALION 



IIHQAND 
SERVICE CO! 



1 x BRM-1 



BMP 
RE CON CO 










COHQ 





IBRDM RECON; 
■: ASSAULT CO 



1 



RADIO/RADAR 
RECON CO 

. i 



COHQ: 






1 X BRM-1 



IreconpltI 



1 x ACV, BRDM-2U 

... I 



LONG-RANGE 

RECON PLT 
WHEELED 



3 x BMP-1 or 2 
1 x Chem Recon BRDM-2Rkh 6 x AbL \' BRDM " 2 



RECON PLTl 



LONG-RANGE 
I RECON PLT 



6 x ASC, BRDM-2 or 



3 x T-64, 72, or 80 6 x APCi B TR-60, 70, or 80 



NOTE: 1. BRM-1 includes TALL MIKE radar. 

2. Personnel in the Recon Assault Co are parachute or airmobile trained. Small teams of 
5 to 6 soldiers are trained to enter the enemy rear area by parachute, helicopter, 
vehicle, or foot. They can land by helicopter (Mi-6A or Mi-26) with their vehicles. 



OTHER RECONNAISSANCE ASSETS WITHIN THE DIVISION 



ARTILLERY RECON 
UNIT BTR . . 



CHEM PLT ! 



ENGR CO 



INCLUDES: 

2 x BTR- 60, 70, or 80 

1 x MTLB with BIG FRED radar 

1 x BMP 1975 PRP-3 with SMALL FRED 



3 x BTR-50 or 60 
2 x UAZ TRUCK 



4 x Chem Recon 
BRDM-2 Rkh 



Figure 10-1. Division reconnaissance assets. 



10-4 



FM 34-2-1 



RECON 
CO 



COHQ 

• 1 I 



111 recon ill 

PLT (TRACKED) 



II IfRECONjiii 
PLT (WHEELED 



MOTORCYCLE 

llllfSECTIONll!; 



1 x BRM-1 
with TALL MIKE 
Radar 



3 x BMP-1 or 2 



4 x BRDM-2 



3 x Motorcycle 



OTHER RECONNAISSANCE ASSETS WITHIN THE REGIMENT 



ATRY BN 



,•■■■■,.• : 



ICHEMPLT 



ENGR CO 



Includes: 

1xBMP M1975 PRP-3 

with SMALL FRED radar 

8 x ACRV 



Includes: 

3 x Chem Recon 

BRDM-2 Rkh/m 



Includes: 
3 x BTR-60 



NOTE: Frogmen may be attached to assist in the reconnaissance of water obstacles. 



Figure 10-2. Regimental reconnaissance assets. 



reinforced platoons as combat 
reconnaissance patrols. 

REGIMENT 

A reconnaissance company 
with two reconnaissance 
platoons provides regimental 
reconnaissance. These normally 
mounted platoons perform 
reconnaissance across the 
regimental front. The 
reconnaissance company will 
normally operate 25 to 30 
kilometers forward of the 



regimental main body, but may 
operate a maximum of 50 
kilometers forward. 

These platoons, broken down 
into patrols, are the eyes and 
ears of the commander. They 
normally consist of one to 
three vehicles. Their purpose 
is to provide information about 
enemy location, composition, 
and formations. These patrols 
stress reconnaissance and will 
avoid detection and engagement 
by the enemy. 



10-5 



FM 34-2-1 



Patrols, however, can 
fight. Personnel and vehicle 
armament provide sufficient 
firepower for these 
reconnaissance elements to 
protect and disengage 
themselves if necessary. 

DIVISION 

Division reconnaissance 
assets provide the commander 
ground, air defense, chemical, 
engineer, electronic, and 
signal reconnaissance, as well 
as target acquisition. These 
assets are located throughout 
the division, especially 
artillery and rocket units. 

For troop reconnaissance, 
the division has an organic 
reconnaissance battalion that 
includes two reconnaissance 
companies, a reconnaissance 
assault company (RAC) , and 
other technical reconnaissance 
assets. Due to the 
unclassified nature of this 
manual, technical 
reconnaissance assets are not 
presented here. For additional 
information on the technical 
reconnaissance assets, refer to 
the Defense Intelligence Agency 
(DIA) Study, "Reconnaissance 
and Surveillance and Target 
Acquisition of the USSR. 

The two division 
reconnaissance companies will 
normally provide coverage 
across the division front, 
operating between the 
regimental reconnaissance 
company and RAC. These 
companies typically perform 
close reconnaissance missions 



for the division commander, 
with a primary mission of 
reconnaissance rather than 
combat. 

Ideally, these companies 
will locate high priority 
targets, such as headquarters 
and C 3 facilities, as well 
as unit deployments and 
movements. Normally, these 
units will operate as small 
patrols of two to three 
vehicles with troops mounted. 
Troops will dismount to perform 
foot patrols or ambushes to 
gather information. However, 
their vehicles will not be far 
away. 

The RAC (also called 
long-range reconnaissance 
company) performs division 
long-range reconnaissance. 
It also provides the division 
commander with a look-deep 
capability out to 100 
kilometers. Small teams of 
five or six soldiers from 
this company can be inserted 
by parachute, helicopter, 
vehicle, or on foot to collect 
information within the enemy 
rear area. These teams will 
move primarily on foot, 
avoiding engagements with 
enemy forces, and will locate 
high priority targets within 
the enemy's division rear and 
corps forward area. 

While the primary 
mission of these troops is 
reconnaissance, they may 
also have secondary missions 
to conduct disruptive 
operations in the rear area, 
such as— 



10-6 



FM 34-2-1 



o Ambushes. 

o Prisoner snatches. 

o Traffic diversions. 

o Disruption of lines of 
communication (LOC) . 

o Limited attacks against 
important targets of 
opportunity. 

When not operating in the 
enemy area, this company is 
capable of providing additional 
reconnaissance patrols mounted 
in their organic vehicles 
within the division area. 

RECONNAISSANCE FUNDAMENTALS 

Reconnaissance plays an 
important part in the overall 
intelligence-gathering system. 
It can provide confirmation 
of other collection assets. 
It often provides initial 
information that can be 
confirmed by other means, 
such as electronic or signal 
reconnaissance. 

TROOP RECONNAISSANCE 

Troop reconnaissance is 
responsive to the commander's 
needs and can provide timely 
information on which to base 
command decisions. 

Division and regimental 
reconnaissance efforts are 
carefully planned, coordinated, 
and supervised by the chief of 
reconnaissance; while battalion 
and lower commanders must 
accomplish the task themselves. 



RECONNAISSANCE PATROLS 

Reconnaissance patrols 
will gain information by 
observation; they will bypass 
defenders. However, they will 
fight if required. Normally 
the tanks and BMPs will 
overwatch the BRDMs. BMPs and 
BRDMs will make a detailed 
reconnaissance of all likely 
enemy positions, with the tanks 
providing cover. 

CHEMICAL-ENGINEER 
RECONNAISSANCE 

Chemical-engineer 
reconnaissance teams will move 
behind the lead reconnaissance 
elements. When obstacles or 
contaminated areas are located, 
they will be marked and their 
locations reported to the 
regimental commander. 
Reconnaissance elements will 
use bounding overwatch 
techniques. IFigure 10-31 shows 
the Soviet reconnaissance 



overwatch. IFigure 10-4| shows 
Soviet reconnai ssance overw atch 
with patrols. IFigure 10-5 



shows Soviet technique pa 
with overwatch. 



rols 



USING INTELLIGENCE 

PREPARATION OF THE 

BATTLEFIELD TO SUPPORT 

YOUR COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE 

EFFORT 

Once again, the IPB process 
can help in your planning. The 
two most important products you 
will develop in CR are 
situation templates and event 
templates. It will be helpful 
to develop a series of 



10-7 



FM 34-2-1 



2d ECHELON 



1st ECHELON 



ADVANCE 
GUARD 



CRP 



REGIMENTAL 
RECON 





30 to 50 km 



10 to 15 km 



O 



DIVISION q 
RECON ^ 



o 

▼ 

o 

▼ 

o 

v 



o 



▼ 

o 

I 



cp 

▼ 

o 

▼ 

o 



T 

o 

V 



Figure 10-3. Soviet doctrinal deployment (meeting engagement). 



Figure 10-4. Soviet reconnaissance overwatch. 




10-8 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 10-5. Soviet reconnaissance overwatch with patrols. 



situation templates which 
depict enemy reconnaissance 
movement. Such templates allow 
you to develop your event 
template; and let your S3 
visualize how you expect the 
enemy to conduct their 
rpronnaissrm re battle. 
Figure 10-6| is a sample of 
one such situation template. 

SITUATION TEMPLATE 

Do not make the mistake 
of thinking the enemy's 
reconnaissance will use the 
same AAs as the enemy main 
force. Remember, enemy 
reconnaissance elements will 
most likely operate as two or 
three vehicles. Such small 
elements can traverse almost 
any kind of terrain. Keep 
in mind, the mission of 
reconnaissance is to seek 
and report information, not 
to fight. Therefore, enemy 



reconnaissance will use routes 
that have plenty of concealment 
and cover. 

Also remember, enemy 
reconnaissance is looking for 
the best route of attack; the 
enemy may decide that attacking 
over rough terrain is 
preferable to attacking open, 
but heavily defended, country. 
For this reason, be sure to 
consider your entire AI when 
you develop your situation 
templates. Do not get "tunnel 
vision" and consider only 
obvious AAs or MCs. 

Look at all ways the enemy 
can enter your sector, 
including using No-Go terrain! 
As a general rule, the more 
concealment or protection a 
route provides, the more likely 
it will be used by 
reconnaissance elements. The 
outcome of well prepared 



10-9 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 10-6. Situation template of enemy reconnaissance 



situation templates is a 
commander and staff that have 
a good indication of what the 
enemy will look like on the 
battlefield. This eventually 
will save your R&S assets many 
hours of unnecessary 
reconnaissance or surveillance. 

EVENT TEMPLATE 

Based on your situation 
templates, develop your event 
template. Your event template 
will show where on the 



battlefield you expect to see 
enemy reconnaissance elements. 
Then concentrate your R&S 
attention on those areas (NAI) 
to detect enemy reconnaissance 
activity. 

Remember, the key to CR 
intelligence support is finding 

those enemy reconnaissance 
units before they can discover 
friendly positions and report 

back. Therefore, you must 
carefully study the effects of 
weather and terrain on enemy 



10-10 



FM 34-2-1 



reconnaissance to determine at 
what point the enemy can 
observe friendly positions. 
Usually, this is a function 
of observation (LOS) and 
visibility in your unit's AI. 

Compare these limits with 
the enemy's known 
reconnaissance observation 
capabilities (such as infrared, 
thermal, light enhancement, and 
telescopic). As you do this, 
you wifl begin to identify a 
limit of enemy advance (LOEA). 
Essentially, you must prevent 
the enemy from going beyond 
this limit; because past that 
limit, the enemy can observe 
friendly positions. 



|Figure 10-7| shows an 
example of an LOEA, or you can 
recommend a phase line (PL) 
that represents the LOEA. 

R&S PLAN 

You should focus your R&S 
assets forward of the LOEA to 
identify enemy reconnaissance 
before they can spot your 
unit's positions. 
Additionally, your analysis of 
the terrain may indicate there 
are isolated terrain features 
forward of the LOEA you must 
control to prevent enemy 
observation of your unit's 
position. 

For example, you may have 
determined, based on general 
terrain and weather conditions, 
that your LOEA is 5 kilometers 
in front of your FEBA. 
However, you discover there are 
two hills approximately 7 to 8 



kilometers in front of your 
FEBA which allow observation of 
your unit's positions. 
Essentially, those three hills 
become key terrain for the CR 
battle. You must prevent the 
enemy f rom occupyi ng those 
hills. iFigure l0-8| snows you 
an example of this. 

By integrating your LOEA 
and key terrain with your event 
template, you have narrowed the 
battlefield to specific points 
or areas where you can focus 
your R&S assets. You can now 
go through the process of 
determining SIR, matching R&S 
assets with SIR and NAI, and 
developing detailed R&S 
instructions. 

COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE 

Remember, normally your S3 
will actually task units for 
the CR mission based on your 
input. (Of course, this may 
differ depending on unit SOP.) 
Because of the importance of 
winning the CR battle, many 
units use a large CR force. 
(Sometimes this force may be up 
to one-third of the entire 
unit.) 

FINDING THE ENEMY 

Your S3 will task-organize 
the CR force based on the 
commander's guidance, your R&S 
requirements, and your estimate 
of the enemy reconnaissance 
force. 

You have a big role to play 
in forming the CR force. This 
implies, however, you know 



10-11 



FM 34-2-1 












«W»J«rW 







10-12 



Figure 10-7. Limit of enemy advance. 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 10-8. Example of key terrain. 



10-13 



FM 34-2-1 



something about friendly R&S 
capabilities, maneuver 
capabilities, organization, 
tactics, and equipment. 
Therefore, you cannot afford 
to concentrate solely on 
threat forces. 

TARGETING 

So far this chapter 
discussed finding enemy 
reconnaissance elements. The 
other side of the CR mission 
is to target and destroy or 
suppress those reconnaissance 
elements so they cannot report 
your unit's position. You have 
a role to play in this aspect 
of the CR mission as well. 

Remember, during the 
war-gaming process, the 
commander and the S3 identified 
friendly COAs. Part of that 
process was— 

o Developing TAI. 

o Deciding how best to 
engage enemy units at TAI. 

o Formulating decision 
points or lines. 

As the S2, you are the 
expert on the enemy, weather, 
and terrain. Based on your 
situation templates, you 
have a good idea which enemy 
reconnaissance units will 
go where. Based on your IPB 
terrain and weather analyses, 
you have a good idea where 
on the battlefield your unit 
can best engage those enemy 
reconnaissance units. 
Therefore, you are in a 
position to recommend to 



your S3 various engagement 
areas or ambush sites (TAI) 
in which to catch enemy 
reconnaissance elements. 

Once again, remember, you 
must destroy or suppress 
enemy reconnaissance before 
they can discover your unit's 

Positions and report back, 
herefore, any TAI you 
recommend should be forward 
of the LOEA. You will also 
want to point out any key 
terrain you have discovered 
to your S3. Key terrain are 
natural TAI, since the enemy 
recognizes their importance 
as much as you do. Do not 
forget the role EW can play 
in suppressing enemy 
reconnaissance units. 

Although your S3 is 
responsible for planning the 
use of EW, you and the IEWSE 
can recommend its employment. 
Both of you should plan an 
ESM program that will support 
any E W use. Remember, enemy 
reconnaissance elements are 
priority targets of jamming 
and/or DF. You can also 
integrate smoke and obscurants 
to multiply the effectiveness 
of your EW effort. 

USING R&S MISSIONS 
TO SUPPORT CR 

As explained before, CR 
essentially consists of finding 
the enemy reconnaissance; then 
destroying or suppressing those 
elements oefore they can report 
friendly unit positions. This 
implies some friendly elements 
will act as finders and some 
will act as shooters. 



10-14 



FM 34-2-1 



Normally, the scout platoon 
should be finders, not 
shooters. They do not have 
the organic firepower to 
decisively engage enemy units. 
However, your scouts must be 
linked to the shooters, to 
include aviation, maneuver, 
and artillery. You may 
position your scouts along a 
screen line so they can 
observe NAI or concealed 
routes into your sector. The 
scouts then report detection 
of enemy reconnaissance and 
provide targeting data to the 
shooters. 

You may also augment your 
scouts or R&S mission with 
armor, mechanized infantry, 
light infantry, or AT 
elements. In this situation, 
you might employ your scouts 
as roving teams. The scout 
element finds the enemy 
reconnaissance, informs the 
S3, who then calls in the 
armor, infantry, aviation, or 
in direct fire a ssets to destroy 
it. iFigure 10-9| is an example 



of scout employme nt to sc reen 
concealed routes. IFigure 



110-101, is an example of the 
use of mechanized^ infantry with 
scouts under operational 
control. 

To effectively plan your 
portion of the CR mission, 
you need to know how threat 
reconnaissance operates. For 
additional information on 
threat smoke and obscurant 
employment, refer to the 
Joint Test Command Group 
manual, 61 JTCG/ME-87-fO, 
Handbook for Operational 
Testing of Electro-optical 
Systems in Battlefield 
Obscurants. 

This chapter discussed 
various staff roles in the 
CR mission, how y ou can 
contribute, and now the threat 
performs reconnaissance at 
regimental and division 
levels. It is also important 
for you to do your "homework" 
to find out how the various 
threat forces conduct 
dismounted reconnaissance. 



10-15 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 10-9. Using scouts to screen concealed routes. 



10-16 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 10-10. 



Example of the use of mechanized infantry with 
scouts under operational control. 



10-17 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 11 

RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE 
IN LOW-INTENSITY CONFLICT 



During LIC operations, R&S 
must provide your commander a 
wide range of information in a 
complex environment. 

FACTORS 

Factors to consider when 
planning R&S in an LIC 
environment include— 

o US forces mission— 
counterinsurgency, combatting 
terrorism, peacekeeping 
operation, or peacetime 
contingency operations. 

o Threat—conventional 
forces, insurgent forces, 
terrorists, demonstrators, or 
a combination of two or more. 

o Environment— social, 
psychological, political, and 
economic factors. Terrain and 
weather are also important 
considerations. 

o Host nation government- 
support, information sharing, 
security forces, and military 
forces. 

The US force's mission, 
environment, and host-nation 
government are influences that 
have an affect on what we do 
offensively or defensively. 
However, the LIC threat will 
require you to spend the most 
time learning how to predict 
the enemy's next move. 



THREAT 

The LIC threat can range 
from demonstrations, terrorist 
acts, insurgent or guerrilla 
activity to confrontations with 
conventional forces. The 
characteristics of a threat 
force depend on the level of 
insurgency. US maneuver forces 
will most likely face insurgent 
forces or a hostile country 
conventional military force. 
Your unit may face 
demonstrators or terrorist 
threats. But primary popula- 
tion control responsibility is 
with the host nation. 

Insurgent or guerrilla 
forces usually fight in small 
cells. They carry light 
weapons and can concentrate 
forces against major 
facilities, then disperse after 
the operation. Insurgent 
forces can operate in urban 
areas but prefer remote areas 
for better concealment and 
security. You can expect to 
fight squad- to platoon-size 
forces when facing insurgent 
forces. They will rely on— 

o Well-planned ambushes. 

o Attacks on soft targets. 

o Sniper and mortar 
attacks. 



11-1 



FM 34-2-1 



The objective is to 
demoralize and frustrate their 
opponent by attacking a variety 
of targets in a wide AO. 
Segments of the populace can 
play a key role in the 
insurgent intelligence net; in 
which case, they would become 
a primary target of friendly 
CI efforts. 

Guerrilla forces need 
support from political 
sympathizers or foreign 
powers. They need an effective 
system of obtaining food, 
ammunition, weapons, equipment, 
and training. In some cases 
insurgents conduct raids for 
equipment. By eliminating 
insurgent supply nets and 
sources they lose combat 
effectiveness. 

See DA Pam 381-3, How Latin 
American Insurgents Fight, for 
detailed information. 

CONVENTIONAL THREAT 
FORCES IN LIC 

Conventional threat forces 
in an LIC environment conduct a 
variety of missions. These 
missions involve advising and 
assisting insurgent forces on 
how to fight. Conventional 
threat forces train insurgents 
on the use of sophisticated 
weapons or act as leaders for 
insurgent units. This 
involvement depends on support 
provided by the hostile 
government. 

Conventional threat forces 
can operate in traditional 



roles attacking and defending 
to support insurgents. These 
forces are infantry, or 
mechanized infantry supported 
by artillery, mortars, and 
armored vehicles. Alone with 
limited CAS, they could nave 
NBC weapons. 

Their equipment is a mix 
from severaT major weapons- 
producing countries (for 
example, United States, 
Belgium, Soviet Union, China, 
and West Germany) . Usually 
this equipment is a generation 
or two older than that found 
in modern armies. However, 
this trend is slowly changing. 
The type of weapons used in 
an LIC environment varies 
from homemade weapons (mines 
or shotguns) to sophisticated 
weapons (SA-7's). 
Understanding the capabilities 
of guerrilla/insurgent weapons 
and collection and target 
acquisition systems helps you 
in R&S planning. 

GUERRILLA /INSURGENT 
OPERATIONS 

Guerrilla operations are 
those military actions executed 
with selected commands and 
combatants. For this reason, 
it is necessary to obtain 
specific enemy information, 
and to know the enemy's 
situation by observation. 
In guerrilla operations, 
attacking by surprise and 
having control of key terrain 
are essential. 



11-2 



FM 34-2-1 



Everyone who engages in 

fuerrilla operations, oesides 
eing elusive, must have had 
excellent training and 
preparation. The following 
are general prerequisites or 
priorities for the preparation 
of an individual guerrilla 
fighter. 

o Physical conditioning. 

o High morale. 

o Individual combat 
training. 

o Land navigation and 
knowledge of the terrain. 

o Complete understanding 
of the mission. 

o Clear understanding 
of his or her role in the 
mission. 

o Discipline. 

o Esprit de corps. 

o Aggressiveness, 
dexterity, self-confidence, 
valor, and courage. 

o Decisiveness and 
patience. 

Guerrilla operations 
include-- 

o The ambush. 

o The incursion. 

o The surprise attack. 

o Sabotage (machinery, 
electrical energy, and 
telephone). 



o Infiltration (capture 
of personnel, weapons, and 
documents). 

In every guerrilla 
operation, the execution of 
the mission must be guaranteed. 

Current and accurate enemy 
information, including terrain 
and weather knowledge, are key 
to prepare, plan, ana execute 
the mission. Every small 
detail must be covered in the 
plan, and nothing should be 
overlooked. 

For each guerrilla 
operation, training or 
simulated attack must be 
conducted and verified; these 
must be in terrain which 
closely resembles the site 
characteristics where the 
operation will be carried out. 

Individual guerrilla 
training must be continuous; 
it must always strive for 
superiority in all aspects of 
training. Training must focus 
on the prerequisites mentioned 
above. 

Coordination is a high 
priority during each guerrilla 
operation. Coordination 
ensures teamwork and helps to 
guarantee the success of the 
operation. 

Selected commands and 
combatants, as well as 
weaponry, are key ingredients 
for the operation. Each 
guerrilla fighter must make 
full use of weapons and must 
not fire continuously. It is 
very important that strict fire 
discipline be followed. 

11-3 



FM 34-2-1 



Terrain knowledge, 
appropriate camouflage, and 
surprise are essential 
elements during the execution 
of a guerrilla operation. 

Surprise, security, 
rational use of resources, 
and economy of force are the 
key principles of guerrilla 
warfare tactics. These must 
be followed in every guerrilla 
operation. 

Guerrillas around the 
world typically fight the 
same way. They use surprise, 
night operations, careful 
planning and selection of 
targets, and timing to 
inflict the greatest damage. 
They are particularly sensitive 
to the propaganda value of 
the psychological impact of 
every action they take, from 
a single terrorist act 
(bombing or political 
assassination) to a major 
assault on a critical 
installation. 

Guerrillas can best be 
described as capable, all- 
weather soldiers who live 
off the land, thus reducing 
the amount of rations they 
need to carry. They operate 
in their own domain and, 
because of their familiarity 
with it, can negotiate the 
most difficult terrain in 
any kind of weather, at any 
time of the day. They usually 
attack at night to ensure the 
element of surprise. The 
overall combat effectiveness 
of these fighters is usually 
good . 



UPPER ECHELON ORGANIZATION 

The guerrilla's military 
organization is a network of 
insurgent groups placed in 
different parts of a country. 
It has a definite command 
structure based on geographical 
location. Thus, a "Northern 
Command," an "Eastern Command," 
a "Central Command," and a 
"Northwest Command" would 
correspond to the area of the 
country in which each c ommand 
operates. |Figure ll-l| shows a 
typical insurgent organization. 

The guerrilla military 
organization is headed by a 
general staff with staff 
departments organized to 
fulfill training, logistic, 
troop, intelligence, and 
operational functions. 
Figure 11-21 shows t he general 



s t a i i . |Figure 11^3 shows the 



1 o g i s t i c statt. [Figure 11-4 



shows the troop staff 

The guerrilla military 
forces have an infrastructure 
ranging from a brigade of 
several thousand down to a 
cell of three to five people. 
Falling in between are 
battalions or columns with 
500; detachments, 100; 
platoons, 20 plus; and 
squads, 10. 

The largest insurgent force 
normally encountered during 
combat is the platoon. The 
platoon consists of the 
platoon leader and two or 
three squads. Each squad has 
7 to 11 soldiers, a squad 
leader, an information or 



11-4 



FM 34-2-1 



URBAN 



ORGANIZATION 



I1|cell||| 



CELL! 



I CELL | 



lllCELLIIll 



POLITICAL 
ORGANIZATION 



COMMANDO 

TERRORIST 
ORGANIZATION 



COMMANDO 

TERRORIST 

ORGANIZATION 



• RURAL;: 
GUERRILLA 

J ORGA>izX!lON 



■ NORTHERN HI 
FRONT/ 
W COMMAND 



EASTERN 
FRONT/ ; 
COMMAND I 




SUBCOMMAND 



SUBCOMMAND 



| CELL | 



I cellII 



III centralII 

FRONT/ % 
COMMAND 



SUBCOMMAND 



[:cCELL|| I CELL I 



J CELL J 



SUBCOMMAND 



CELL) 



CELL 



CELLS 



NORTHWEST 

,':>• FRONT/ • 
"COMMAND: 



SUBCOMMAND 



Figure 11-1. Insurgent organization. 



11-5 



FM 34-2-1 



GENERAL STAFF 
OF A GUERRILLA 

illMIUTARY., j 
If ORGANIZATION 



MILITARY 
I INSTRUCTION III 

::: ... • • -,,... ::;!•:: 

STAFF 

, ■ ' ; 



1 ' . Ill 

POLITICAL*;: 
INSTRUCTION I 
STAFF 



1 
MILITARY 
INSTRUCTOR 



LOGISTIC 

STAFF ; 



TROOP STAFF 



||;|political11|I 
ii) instructor ii 



|!|pIUTARY|| 
INSTRUCTOR 



: mM& 



POLITICAL 
INSTRUCTOR 






lifMLITARYJ! 

instructor) 



political;; 

INSTRUCTOR 



OPERATIONS 
111 STAFF 



SCOUTING UNIT 



INTELLIGENCE 

ISfuNIT 



Figure 11-2. General staff. 



11-6 



FM 34-2-1 




ARMS AND | 
MUNITIONS 



: MEDICAL ; 
EQUIPMENT 





NOTE: All these groups are mobilized to back up the fighting units. With the exception of 
the group in charge of medical equipment, these individuals are not combat trained and serve 
by supplying the combatants with munitions or by acting as medics. The arms and ammunition 
personnel guard the caches of weapons and the shops where weapons are repaired and 
munitions manufactured. 



Figure 11-3. Logistic staff. 













































if TROOP 11 
STAFF 
































1ST 
J! COLUMN 11 








2D 

| COLUMNJ 




. COLUMN ; ; 
















































| 




1STPLT 


1 2D PLT 
1 


3D PI 


-I 




1STPLT 


2D 


PLT 


[ 3D 


PLT 




1ST 


PLT 




'Id 


PLT; 


3D PLT 






























|| 1ST 111 

1-squad;; 




squad] 











































Figure 11-4. Troop staff. 



11-7 



FM 34-2-1 



political officer, and a 
messenger. Squads are 
sometimes subdivided into 
smaller units of three to 
five men (including a leader); 
these are also referred to 
as subsquads. 

SUBSQUADS 

These smaller units, called 
subsquads, have the following 
missions: 

o Combat subsquads maintain 
security for the remainder of 
the squad during movement. 

o Sabotage subsquads 
consist of a demolition section 
and a security section. The 
security section provides 
security to the demolition 
section during sabotage 
operations. 

o Reconnaissance subsquads 
consist of a reconnaissance 
section and a security section. 

PLATOON 

The guerrilla platoon is 
the basic (tactical) unit of 
the guerrillas. It is made up 
of-- 

o One platoon leader. 

o Two squads (of 7 to 11 
guerrillas each). Each squad 
also has one leader. 

o Each squad can be 
subdivided into two subgroups, 
depending on the mission. 

Platoon organizations are-- 



o Combat platoons have two 
squads: one assault squad and 
one security squad. 

o Reconnaissance platoons 
have two squads: one 
reconnaissance squad and one 
security squad. 

o Other platoons provide 
logistic support (storehouses 
for arms), withdrawal sites, 
communications system, 
transport, firing ranges and 
maneuver sites, underwater 
demolition, sabotage, and 
propaganda. 

COMMAND AND CONTROL 

The insurgent organization 
and chain of command simply 
consists of leaders and 
followers. Insurgent 
commanders exercise control 
over their forces by delegating 
command authority down to the 
platoon and squad levels. 
Although several platoons may 
be committed in combat, all 
missions are assigned and 
conducted at the squad level. 

Insurgent combat units may 
operate alone when seizing 
terrain, but all unit 
commanders must ensure that the 
high command provides detailed 
instructions for their unit. 
The leader of a combat unit is 
expected to exercise effective 
control of all combatants, to 
assign specific functions, and 
to see that they are strictly 
complied with. 

Insurgents are also trained 
to use their own initiative 



11-8 



FM 34-2-1 



when faced with unforeseen 
situations. The unit must be 
flexible and capable of solving 
problems associated with 
missions assigned by the 
supreme command in such areas 
as-- 

o Communications. 

o Chain of command. 

o Mobilization of forces. 

o The use of equipment and 
firepower. 

EQUIPMENT 

Insurgents require the same 
combatant gear to perform their 
mission as the friendly forces; 
however, insurgents do not 
usually have the same 
equipment. Theirs is obtained 
from a variety of sources 
through a complex logistic 
system. Weapons, food, 
medicine, and other supplies 
are obtained by one of the 
following methods: black 
market, captured, stolen, or 
provided by second-party 
sources. 

Much of the equipment is 
obtained from government forces 
through raids on isolated 
outposts or ambushes on 
military units and convoys; 
additional guerrilla supplies 
and arms come from other 
countries. Some equipment is 
purchased abroad with money 
obtained through terrorist 
activities (kidnapping and 
robbery) . 

A more popular and 
practical means of obtaining 



military supplies is by 
capturing government weapons; 
this ensures an abundant supply 
of ammunition and repair parts 
is available. The three 
essential requirements of 
insurgent weapons are 
availability, simplicity, and 
efficiency. 

Usually, each combatant has 
the following equipment: 

o Rifle: Belgian FAL; 
Israeli Galil; German G-3; 
Soviet AK-47 or AKM; Czech 
M-25; and United States M-2, 
M-14, or M-16. 

o Pack or knapsack. 

o Web belt. 

o Canteen. 

o Beret, cap, or hat. 

o Protective combat 
clothing that blends with the 
terrain. 

o Combat boots. 

o Knife and steel blade. 

o Weapon cleaning 
equipment. 

o Nylon cord, approximately 
2 meters long. 

o Square of plastic, 2 by 2 
meters (to protect weapon from 
rain) . 

o Medication kit (such as 
aspirin, bandages) . 

Each unit has a radio 
(probably commercial type, AM 

11-9 



FM 34-2-1 



or FM) to keep the insurgents 
informed of the news. 

An insurgent unit may have 
one or more of the following 
weapons: 

o Hand grenades 
(fragmentation, concussion, and 
incendiary). 

o Grenade launchers. 

o Mortars. 

o Mines of the claymore 
type. 

o An assortment of AT and 
air defense weapons. 

ARTILLERY 

Artillery is the principal 
fire power for some insurgent 
forces. Insurgents use it 
because of its range, volume of 
fire, and accuracy. The 
principal mission for an 
artillery unit is to neutralize 
or destroy the enemy and their 
means of combat. Mortars and 
recoilless weapons are usually 
the preferred artillery pieces 
used by the guerrilla, probably 
due to their mobility and 
portability. 

Guerrillas can and will use 
captured heavier weapons. They 
will transport them by 
commercial vehicles into the 
battle area; or abandon them, 
if necessary, if they impede 
their withdrawal from the 
area. Artillery is classified 
according to-- 

o Recoil construction and 
type of tube. 



o Caliber: small caliber, 
20 to 57 mm; medium caliber, 58 
to 152 mm; large caliber, over 

152 mm. 

o Bore: smooth (mortar), 
the 205 mm has grooves. 

o Firing: high angle or 
flat trajectory. 

o Means of transport: 
mechanical traction or 
self-propelled. 

o Initial velocity 
classified as follows: mortars 
from 150 to 400 meters per 
second; a howitzer from 300 
to 600 meters per second; 
and cannons from 900 to 
1,500 meters per second. 

It is important to note 
that some of this equipment 
is homemade, such as uniforms, 
pistol belts, and harnesses. 
Insurgent camps sometimes 
contain factories where Molotov 
cocktails; booby traps; 
claymore type mines; grenades; 
and ammunition, including 
mortars, can be produced at 
little cost in a short time. 

TYPES AND SOURCES OF SUPPLIES 

The guerrilla, by 
necessity, uses a wide variety 
of weapons, some self- 
manufactured, some captured, 
and some supplied from outside 
sources. In the earlier stages 
of a war, the weapons are 
usually primitive, homemade 
rifles, Tiand grenades, and 
claymore type mines; trails 
are crudely oooby-trapped with 
Punji stakes and shallow pits 
lined with nail boards. 



11-10 



FM 34-2-1 



Nearly every guerrilla war 
has produced ingenious 
improvisations, both from 
necessity and to avoid a 
cumbersome logistic supply 
system. Nothing can be simpler 
to construct and use than a 
Molotov cocktail or a plastique 
bomb; and under certain 
conditions, nothing can be more 
effective. 

Arms and Ammunition 

All types of arms are 
needed for a guerrilla 
movement. However, there are 
three important factors which 
insurgents have to keep in mind 
when arms are selected: 
weight, range, and rate of 
fire. Guerrillas carry their 
weapons for long periods of 
time, thus the weapon must be 
as light as possible. The 
weapons must be effective both 
at snort and long range. 
Maximum rate of fire is 
critical since guerrillas 
need to place a large amount 
of fire in a short amount of 
time. With a variety of 
weapons comes the need for 
different types of ammunition. 
Individuals responsible for 
acquiring ammunition must be 
able to distinguish between the 
different types and caliber 
rounds needed. 

Food 

Just as with arms and 
ammunition, food is a basic 
necessity for a guerrilla 
movement. It must be easy to 
carry, nutritious, and not 
perishable (such as chocolate, 
condensed milk, dried fish or 



meat, rice, beans, cereals, 
sugar, coffee) . The main 
sources for food are local 
villages, supplies left behind 
by government troops, 
warehouses, stores, and the 
land itself. 

Explosives 

Explosives are the key to 
guerrilla operations due to 
their destructive power. They 
are used to destroy bridges, 
railroad lines, airports of 
military value, communication 
lines, and electrical towers. 
To acquire explosives, 
clandestine groups are formed 
which operate in areas where 
explosives are used. By 
attacking vehicles whicn 
transport the explosives, 
they are able to obtain the 
explosives needed. 

Hand Grenades 

These can be industrially 
or domestically manufactured. 
There are two types of hand 
grenades: 

o Defensive— A metallic 
container that splinters; has 
an effective range of more 
than 30 m; and is used mostly 
to break out of a siege by 
disorganizing the enemy. 

o Offensive— A container 
filled with an explosive 
charge, which when ignited, 
creates a proliferous blast 
of fire or pellets. This type 
is used mostly for ambushes 
and in attacks on garrisons. 
It also serves to disorganize 
the enemy, as well as cause 
casualties. 



11-11 



FM 34-2-1 



External Supplies 

Nicaragua has been the 
main source of external 
supplies since the start of 
insurgences in Central 
America. While in South 
America, Cuba has been the 
primary source guaranteeing 
the guerrillas a sustained 
rate of supply and resupply. 
Supplies are carried by 
aircraft, small boats, trucks 
with false bottoms, stolen 
buses, or pack animals. It 
depends on the terrain and on 
the control exercised by the 
guerrillas in the area in which 
they are operating. 

Internal Supplies 

On the local level, if the 
guerrillas have funds, they 
purchase food and medicine. 
However, this is rare; and 
these are primarily acquired by 
stealing and pillaging from 
villages and towns temporarily 
occupied by guerrilla groups. 
Known as 'war taxes," farmers 
and merchants are threatened 
with death if they fail to pay 
(comply). 

In the cities, safe houses 
serve as storage and 
distribution points for the 
guerrilla's supply network. 
Large caches of weapons and 
ammunition are kept at 
convenient, centrally located, 
and relatively safe geographic 
locations. 

In regions controlled by 
the guerrillas, the 
noncombatant camp followers are 
required to cultivate the land 



for cereals and basic food 
grains, with the guerrillas 
taking half of the harvest. 
In some areas, sugar mills and 
slaughter houses are operated 
by collaborators of the 
guerrillas. Basic food stuffs 
such as beans, rice, cooking 
oil, salt, sugar, and corn are 
collected and stored before an 
insurgent offensive. When not 
in combat, guerrillas are able 
to obtain supplies with money 
almost anytime, anywhere. 

COMMUNICATIONS 

It is impossible to direct 
a war without communications. 
Among the most important forms 
of communication for the 
guerrillas is the radio. There 
are two types of radio 
communications: tactical and 
operative communications and 
strategic communications. 

Tactical and Operative 

These are the radio signals 
used by leaders to command 
their units in operations, 
marches, and encampments. Due 
to the need for maneuverability 
and agility, radios used 
include walkie-talkies, citizen 
band, and PRC-77. 

Strategic 

These are radio signals 
used by strategic commands in 
order to have an overall vision 
of all the fronts of the war 
and to direct the war. In long 
distance communications, a 
variable selection of ham 
radios are used. 



11-12 



FM 34-2-1 



When setting up a base 
camp, the radio operator seeks 
a high location to establish 
effective communications. 
Radio waves require LOS; so 
it is important that the radio 
operators set up operations at 
the highest point to avoid 
natural or artificial objects. 
The radio is always set upright 
with the antenna in a vertical 
position directed towards the 
receiver with whom the 
insurgent wishes to 
communicate. Messages are 
brief. 

Relay stations bridge 
stations that do not have 
direct communication because 
of topographic obstacles or 
too long a distance. There 
are two types of relay 
station: manual (operated by 
an individual) and automatic 
(signal is sent out 
automatically when received) . 

FORMS OF GUERRILLA COMBAT 

To prepare for combat, the 
guerrillas must train in 



isola ted locations. 

11-5| shows a typical guerrilla 



Figure 



training complex." Before the 
guerrillas train on hitting 
targets they are indoctrinated 
on the typic al targets t hey 
should hit. [T 
typical guerr 



Figure 11-6 shows 



Me 



a targets. 



RAID 



This is a fast, surprise 
action carried out against an 
enemy position or force. Its 
purpose is related directly 
to current needs in the 
development of the guerrilla's 



campaign (arms, food, 
propaganda). Generally, raids 
are well planned and carried 
out in small units composed of 
three to twelve individuals. 
They occur more frequently 
in the initial stages of an 
insurgency when few individuals 
and arms are available. Once 
their goal is achieved, the 
force withdraws quickly and 
disperses. 

ASSAULT 

This is a more 
sophisticated, complex attack 
designed to annihilate a target 
and its defenders. As assault 
is of a larger scale and 
purpose, it requires the 
occupation of positions and 
strategic locations since the 
guerrillas are fighting against 
prepared defensive positions of 
the enemy. At a certain phase 
of a local insurgency, the 
prime goal becomes that of 
eliminating enemy units, thus 
changing the correlation of 
forces in the region. 

AMBUSH 

This is an action carried 
out by small units against a 
moving enemy with great 
superiority in soldiers and 
arms. Factors that influence 
the outcome of an ambush are 
location, terrain, position, 
camouflage, signals, and 
retreat. There are three types 
of ambushes: 

o Annihilation— enemy 
troops sustain the maximum 
number of casualties to reduce 
or destroy the combat 



11-13 



FM 34-2-1 






****** 



Sf< 






?A-i"-i 




£ 



WA)) 'i V 02 iff an ^r /• 



8 CV AORIOULTURAL XVu'f >' „' • 

S \\ AHEA ^*«V 



» ..' 



I v 

3 TOWN LOCATED ^ 
d SOUTHWEST FROM^fc. 
a THE TRAINING CAMP 

UJ 

D 
O 



\\ 
W 

w 



LEGEND: 



• Foxholes 
| Buildings 

j£ Destroyed or damaged buildings 

A)) Athletic fields 
Trails 



H/H 



vw 



^ 





W 



Trench 
Bomb craters 

Hand-to-hand combat area 

Underground bunker system 
Perimeter defensive positions 



Figure 11-5. Typical guerrilla training complex. 



11-14 



FM 34-2-1 



ENGINEERING AND 
ENERGY SYSTEMS 


COMMUNICATIONS 
AND SUPPLY 


TRANSPORTATION 


HUMAN 


Hydroelectric plants 

Offshore oil rigs 

Nuclear facility sites 

Gas pipelines 

Dams and electric 
power lines 

Water supply 

Oil and gasoline storage 

Repair facilities 

Explosive storage 


Communications lines and 
facilities 

Chemical storage sites 

Dock facilities 

Equipment warehouses 

Chemical storage sites 

Computer facilities 

Weapons storage sites 
(special and conventional) 

Food storage 


Railroads 

Bus depot 

Airports and aircraft 

Trucking facilities 

Shipyard, docks 

COMMERCE 

Banks 

Gun and sporting 
goods store 


Embassy and government 
officials 

Corporate executives 

Police 

Dependents of the above 

Schools and school buses 

Areas catering to personal 
needs 

Members of military forces 
and their dependents 

Foreign tourists 


MILITARY 


Sensitive weapons 
Arms 

Ammunition 
POL storage 


Logistic and storage 
facilities 

Computer facilities 

Communication centers 


Command and 
control facilities 

Vehicles 


Explosives 

Recreational facilities 
Aircraft 
Maintenance facilities 



Figure 11-6. Typical guerrilla targets. 



11-15 



FM 34-2-1 

effective ness of thp government 
forces. I Figure 11-7| shows a 



typical annihilation ambush. 

o Harassment— enemy troops 
are harassed by engagement in 
small skirmishes to destroy 
their will or to distract and 
tire them, thus causing 
.deterioration of morale. 
Figure 11-8| shows a typical 
harassment ambush. 

o Containment-- enemy forces 
are surrounded by mines, 
obstacles, and small arms fire 
to halt movement to and from a 
specific area; usually to keep 
them from reinforcing a 
government unit in conta ct with 
insurgents. |Figure 11-9| shows 
a typical containment ambush. 

INSURGENT MAP SYMBOLS 

These are the symbols used 
hy known insurgent groups. 



Figure 11-101 shows the military 
mapping symbols. The listing 
includes many military mapping 
symbols used by the Soviet 
armed forces; however, 
different meanings have been 
applied. 

Insurgents normally use the 
symbols that are taught to them 
by the country that is 
providing training and 
equipment. Also refer to DA 
Pam 381-3 for insurgent 
military map symbols. 

MOVEMENT FORMATIONS 

Movement formations 
include-- 

o Column formation. 



o Single firing or line 
formation. 

o Diamond formation, 
o Wedge formation. 



o "L" formation. 



o Two-echelon formation. 

o Fan formation. 

COLUMN FORMATION 

Column formations are used 
for deploying from one area to 
another when government forces 
are not present. When this 
move is performed by a squad, 
all members know their places 
in the formation. Positions 
are numbered in advance by the 
squad leader, and each numbered 

gosition is assigned a mission, 
kid numbers are used for the 
left file of the column; and 
even numbers for the right 
file. The squad leader 
determines the spacing between 
personnel based on tne terrain 
and visibility. 

When required by terrain 
and operational needs, the 
squad leader divides the squad 
into two groups. The assistant 
squad leader takes the second 
group. This formation is 
normally used for movement 
over terrain where there is 
no probability of attack. 
The squad's fire power is 
concentrated on the flanks; 
therefore, the p oint and rea r 
are very weak. iFigure 11-11 



shows the column formation. 



11-16 



FM 34-2-1 




LEGEND: 

^\ Guerrilla firing points 
I (small arms) 

<r Withdrawal Routes 



m 



Government force wheeled 
vehicle (personnel) 

Claymore mine 
(electric detonator) 



Figure 11-7. Typical annihilation ambush. 




LEGEND: 

JL. Guerrilla firing points 
T 1 (small rifle) 

+ Withdrawal routes 

_^m Government force wheeled 
eMlR vehicle (personnel) 



Figure 11-8. Typical harassment ambush. 



11-17 



FM 34-2-1 



LEGEND: 



^h Guerrilla firing points 
(small rifle) 




/ 



Withdrawal routes 



Road block (obstacle) 



Row of mines 



ndH Government force wheeled 

"•""• vehicle (personnel) 



Figure 11-9. Typical containment ambush. 



are not present. When this 
move is performed by a squad, 
all members know their places 
in the formation. Positions 
are numbered in advance by the 
squad leader, and each numbered 

gosition is assigned a mission. 
»dd numbers are used for the 
left file of the column; and 
even numbers for the right 
file. The squad leader 
determines the sparine between 
personnel based on the terrain 
and visibility. 

When required by terrain 
and operational needs, the 
squad leader divides the squad 
into two groups. The assistant 
squad leader takes the second 



group. This formation is 
normally used for movement 
over terrain where there is 
no probability of attack. 
The squad's fire power is 
concentrated on the flanks; 
therefore, the pniol a_o_d m#r 



are very weak. iFigure 11-11 
shows the column formation. 

SINGLE FILE OR 
FIRING LINE FORMATION 

This type of formation 
is used when necessary to 
cover a 100- to a 3 00-Tneter 



area, figure 11-12I shows 
the single file or firing 
line formation. It is used 
when-- 



11-18 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 11-10. Military mapping symbols. 



11-19 



FM 34-2-1 




Squad leader 



Direction of movement 








Assistant squad leader 



Figure 11-11. Column formation. 




Squad leader 







A A A A A A 







Assistant squad leader 



Figure 11-12. Single file or firing line formation. 




Squad leader 




•o 




c^ 




Assistant squad leader 




# Figure 11-13. Diamond formation. 



11-20 



FM 34-2-1 



WEDGE FORMATION 

A wedge formation is used 
for advancing or performing 
reconnaissance over open 
terrain. This formation covers 
the front, as well as both 
flanks; however, the rear is 
undefended. This type of 
formation is used mainly to 
move where there is a 
possibility of being attacked. 
It can also be used to break 
or penetrate an enemy barrier. 
|Figure 11-14| shows the wedge 
formation. 

"L" FORMATION 

The "L" formation is an 
attack formation used, in two 



flanks. Figure 11-15 shows the 

it -r n r — . • O ^~. -i -i 



M L" formation. It can be used 
before the assault by deploying 
one squad to gain a shock while 
the remaining squad provides 
security. From the rormation 
of a single to a double column, 
it can quickly change to a 
diamond formation. These 
changes take place on command 
and are performed as discussed 
below. 

Double Column 

Upon command, odd numbers 
extend to the left, while even 
numbers extend to the right. 
One combatant leads the 
formation at the front while 
the one at the rear provides 



Figure 11-16 



rear security. 

shows a double column 

formation. 



Changing Double Column to 
a Diamond Formation 

In order to change a double 
column to a diamond formation, 



the insurgents change the 
above-mentioned formation. At 
this time, the insurgents on 
the right extend to that side, 
while those on the left ext end 
to the right. 
11-16.1) 



(See |Figure| 
The combatant trom the 
rear guard at the right flank 
maneuvers, while providing rear 
security. The group on the 
left that heads the team 
secures the front. 

TWO-ECHELON FORMATION 

This type of formation is 
used for a deliberate attack or 
a movement to contact. While a 
squad advances, the other one 
supports it; and upon occupying 
a new position, the one 
advancing stops and provides 
support whilp thp othpr unit 
advances. [Figure 1 1 - 1 7| shows 
two-echelon formation. 

FAN FORMATION 

This formation is used when 
the commander calls the unit to 
assemble to assign a mission or 
issue other directives. The 
voice of rom rnand is: "S QUAD 



ASSEMBLE." |Fi^ure 11-18| shows 



the fan formation. 

TACTICAL COMMAND BASIC 
ORGANIZATION 

Basic organizations for the 
tactical command are the basic 
unit operations, basic platoon 
operations f and breaking 
contact. [Figure 11-19 snows 



the basic organization. 

A basic unit operation is 
when one squad conducts 
reconnaissance for about an 
hour before the rest of the 

11-21 



FM 34-2-1 




*+- 



Squad leader C~J^ 

Direction of movement Qy/-~\ 



(/ ) Assistant squad leader i) 



o 



Figure 11-14. Wedge formation. 



Squad leader v^ 

o 

Direction of movement (~\ 

o 



( /) Assistant Squad Leader ^x _ _ _ _^ 

^ O0OOO 



Figure 11 


-15. 


a L" formation. 


/\/\ Squad leader 

Direction of movement 




O <8> O O O 

O O 


(/) Assistant squad leader 



Figure 11-16. Double column formation. 





Squad leader # A A A A 

4 4 A A 
Assistant squad leader 







Figure 11-17. Two-echelon formation. 

11-22 



FM 34-2-1 



( 

( 


' < \/ > \ Squad leader (^ 

o 
^ o 

/ ) Assistant squad leader 


® o 
o 

o s° 




NOTE: Assistant squad leader has no set position. 











Figure 11-18. Fan shape formation. 



INSURGENT 
UNIT TYPE 



(42) 



HI ...LEADER, AND j!||| 
ASSISTANT LEADER 



II LEADER AND 
ASSISTANT LEADER 



1. PLATOON (21) 



2. PLATOON (21) 



































SQUAD 1 




i SQUAD 2 j 




SQUAD 3 



SQUAD 1 I I SQUAD 2 I SQUAD 3 I 



(7) 



(7) 



(7) 



(7) 



(7) 



(7) 



Figure 11-19. Basic organization. 



11-23 



FM 34-2-1 



unit follows. This 
reconnaissance squad then 
occupies key positions for 
observation to prevent 
government forces from 
surprising the unit. 

A basic platoon operation 
is when the first squad 
provides frontal security, the 
second squad covers the flanks, 
and the third assumes the rear 
guard role. 

When breaking contact with 
the enemy, the first platoon 
acts as a delaying force until 
the second platoon withdraws; 
after which, the first platoo n 



* 



gure 



withdr aws by squads. 
' 11-201 lists the sounds produced 
during basic operations. 
Figure 11-211 shows a typical 
base camp which is the hub of 
all operations. 

INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION 

OF THE BATTLEFIELD 

CONSIDERATIONS 

The doctrine that threat 
forces use to operate in LIC 
may not be well known. Your 
initial IPB effort will 
probably require you to modify 
some IPB products to account 
for the Lit environment. These 
products can help you plan 
K&S. Factors not graphically 
portrayed during the normal IPB 
process which come into play 
during LIC include social, 
political, psychological, and 
economic factors. 

CIVILIAN POPULATION 

During LIC operations the 
civilian population plays a key 



role. You enhance your R&S 
plan and the information 
obtained by gaining the support 
of the civilian population. 
You also become familiar with 
the civilian populations 
attitude toward their own 
government and the US forces. 
In most cases, your R&S asset 
will observe or monitor groups 
of civilians to determine if 
they pose a threat. 

The understanding and 
analysis of the civilian 
copulation during the IPB 
process impacts greatly on the 
^&S effort. A lesson learned 
from Operation Just Cause is 
that "the population cannot 
read maps nor give grid 
coordinates." Therefore, when 
providing the intelligence 
information part of IPB during 
prehostilities, build a street 
map, showing city landmarks; 
use this with civilian 
informants. 

IPB PRODUCTS 

Products produced during 
the IPB process impacting on 
the R&S effort vary depending 
on the threat. The mission 
requirement influences the type 
of overlays and subject 
categories needed. The 
following paragraphs cover some 
LIC IPB products and how they 
relate to the R&S effort. 

Incident Overlay 

The incident overlay 
provides the historical data 
needed to look for trends and 
to conduct p attern analys is on 
the threat. Figure 11-22 shows 



11-24 



FM 34-2-1 



SOUND 


DISTANCE THE NORMAL 
HUMAN EAR CAN HEAR IT 


Normal conversation can be heard 


90 to 100 meters 


Conversation in a low voice 


35 to 45 meters 


Conversation of words 


70 to 80 meters 


Normal footsteps 


20 to 30 meters 


Footsteps over leaves and branches 


60 to 80 meters 


Sound of coughing 


55 to 65 meters 


Sound of something being dragged 


10 to 20 meters 


Cocking a weapon 


400 to 500 meters 


Rifle shot 


2 to 3 kilometers 


Automatic weapons fire 


3 to 4 kilometers 


Machete cutting 


1 50 to 250 meters 


Cutting down trees 


250 to 350 meters 


Trees falling down 


750 to 850 meters 


Digging trenches 


1 to 2 kilometers 


NOTE: This chart is based on the approximate distance heard without any outside disruptive influence, 
at sea level. 



Figure 11-20. Sound chart. 



11-25 



FM 34-2-1 



J 



\ 

^m\ hosf 
1 \ ■ 




" . *» 



HOSPITAL / \ 



[KITCHEN f 
-' HOSPITAL 



BLDG 




> ■ >'\ 

^ TAILOR SHOP / , . 

X _, / I BARRACKS/SUPPORT / 

^ „ ^ - \ /< BL0G •' 

- ^ - \ /B\ I (M AIN HOUS E) 




I 



V JAIL 



ADMIN BLDG _ H 



(AV) 




i -* 




/ / 



SHELTER^ ^ comm BLDG ' v 




LEGEND: 



N/A 



Building 

Trench 

Trail 

Bunker 

Construction or obstacle 
is not active at this time 



(AV) Air visible 

• Foxhole 

Cave 

Entrance unimproved 
road or trail 



Figure 11-21. Typical base camp. 



11-26 



FM 34-2-1 




LEGEND: (not to scale) 
Railroad 
Major road 
Bridge 
Airport 

Building 



RED- Insurgent attack, sabotage, 
and killings 
YELLOW- Possible insurgent surveillance 



Dam 
River 
Mines 



BLACK- Site or target penetration, 
attempted penetrations 

GREEN- Insurgents gather equipment 
and supplies (food, weapons, 
and money) 



Figure 11-22. Incident overlay. 



11-27 



FM 34-2-1 



an incident overlay. You can 
identify the types of missions 
the insurgents tend to favor 
and determine the insurgent 
AO. This map will show 
insurgent control or lack of 
control in specific areas. 

Based on this overlay, 
considerations on where to 
focus R&S as sets are made. 
Figure 11-23 shows an incident 
matrix. By constructing an 
incident matrix, the analyst 
can determine the times, days, 
or methods when insurgents will 
attack targets and can 
determine their operational 
trends. The incident overlay 
will require coordination with 
the host nation to ensure 
complete and accurate 
information. 

Situation Map 

The insurgent situation map 
(SITMAP) is built f rom the 
incident overlay. iFigure 11-24 
shows an LIC SITMAP. The 
SITMAP adds current 
intelligence and activities 
which indicate insurgent 
movement, resupply operations, 
or attacks. You will confirm 
or deny information on the 
SITMAP using R&S assets. These 
assets-- 

o Monitor insurgent supply 
routes. 

o Monitor radio 
transmissions. 

o Visit civilian 
communities. 



o Patrol LOC. 

o Patrol critical sites. 

o Provide coordination 
between local law enforcement 
and host nation military units. 

o Provide sketches of 
insurgent bases. 

When briefing patrols, the 
SITMAP warns of danger areas 
such as mines or insurgent 
controlled areas. 

Trap Map 

The trap map identifies 
targets the insurgents will 
attempt to sabotage or attack. 
Figure 11-251 shows an LIC trap 
map. These targets may 
include-- 

o Hydroelectric plants. 

o Weapon storage sites. 

o Airports. 

o Banks. 

o Government offices. 

o Terrain favoring 
ambushes. 

Analyze these areas for 
insurgent access and escape 
routes. Preplan use of R&S 
assets to support trap map 
areas in case indicators snow 
insurgent intent to attack. 
Photographs or sketches of the 
areas can help the analysis and 
planning process. 



11-28 



FM 34-2-1 



ACTIVITY 


DATE/DAY 




TJtfE 


LOCATION 


1. Surveillance of 
hydroelectric 
plant 


06 Sep 

Friday 




1000 
to 1800 


grid 
* yellow 


2. Railroad bridge 
sabotaged 


12 Sep 
Thursday 




2000 
to 2300 


grid 
* red 


3 . Personnel watching 
airport 


08 Oct 
Monday 




0800 
to 1500 


grid 
* yellow 


4. Bridge sabotaged 


21 Sep 
Friday 




2100 
to 2200 


grid 
* red 


5. Attempted 

penetration of 

hydroelectric 

plant 


03 Oct 
Thursday 




0244 


grid 
* black 


6. Mine kills two 
government troops 


15 Oct 
Saturday 




1700 


grid 
* red 


7. Mine damages bus, 
1 killed 5 injured 


15 Oct 
Saturday 




1200 


grid 
* red 


8. Food stolen from 
village warehouse 


17 Oct 
Monday 




0230 


grid 
* green 


9 . Mayor executed 
in village 


18 Oct 
Tuesday 




2100 


grid 
* red 


10. Police uniforms 
and weapons 
stolen 


18 Oct 
Tuesday 




0330 


grid 
* green 


* Color code activity and plot on map as dot with activity 
number next to it. Look for patterns where insurgent forces 
are concentrating efforts. Identify insurgent targets and 
possible isolation or terrorizing of villages. Analyze matrix 
for times or days insurgents may tend to conduct specific 
operations. 



Figure 11-23. Incident matrix. 



11-29 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 11-24. UC SITMAP. 



11-30 



FM 34-2-1 



f||§|^ Heavy 

vegetation 




Figure 11-25. LIC trap map. 



11-31 



FM 34-2-1 



Population Status Overlay 



Figure 11-26| shows a 

¥opulation status overlay, 
his overlay portrays the 
attitude of the population in 
your AO and AL It shows who 
supports the government, who is 
neutral, and who supports the 
insurgents. This overlay can 
further classify population 
into tribal, religious, ethnic, 

Political, or economic groups, 
he detail of information on 
this overlay depends on 
insurgent strategy and 
availability of information. 

Focusing R&S assets toward 
a particular group may provide 
vital information on insurgent 
activity. Knowing pro- 
Government areas ana 
proinsurgent areas will also 
help protect your limited R&S 
assets. 

ASSETS 

R&S assets available during 
LIC operations depend on 
mission and host-nation 
support. Peacetime contingency 
operations will require less 
R&S assets than counter- 
insurgency operations. Close 
coordination with the host 
nation will be vital. 
Information received from local 
agencies will supplement the 
R&S plan. 

Typical collection assets 
available to brigade and 
battalion S2s during LIC 
operations include-- 

o Patrols. 



o Scouts. 

o GSRs. 

o REMBASS. 

o OPs. 

o Radio intercept 
and DF. 

Additional assets depend on 
force package and may include— 

o AN/TPQ-36 countermortar 
radar. 

o AN/MPQ-49 FAAR. 

o Army aviation. 

o QUICKFIX and CI and 
interrogation of prisoner of 
war teams, supporting MPs, 
and host-nation law enforcement 
and intelligence units. 

PATROLS 

In LIC operations, 
patrolling is one of the 
primary ways to obtain and 
develop information. Patrols 
collect data on population, 
insurgent activity, and terrain 
by using a combination of 
route, zone, and area 
reconnaissance. 

Effective patrolling 
provides the location, 
strength, and disposition of 
insurgent forces. Patrols can 
confirm insurgent weapons and 
the presence of foreign 
military advisors. Areas 
requiring special attention 
while planning patrols include 



11-32 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 11-26. Population status overlay. 



11-33 



FM 34-2-1 



rivers, streams, and 
agricultural areas. Patrols 
conducted around key 
installations give early 
warning and prove effective 
during CR or security missions. 

Limitations to consider 
include communication and 
security. The primary means 
of communication for dismounted 
patrols is the FM battery- 
powered AN/PRC-77. Also, 
the patrol's small size leaves 
it vulnerable to ambush or 
attack. 

The scout platoon gathers 
information on insurgent forces 
while conducting patrols or by 
established OPs in assigned 
areas. They conduct much the 
same missions as patrols from 
the line companies; but scouts 
usually extend out farther than 
company patrols. Examples of 
missions that scouts conduct 
include-- 

o Locating and providing 
detailed information on 
insurgent bases. 

o Establishing OPs to 
monitor these bases while 
friendly forces move forward 
to attack. 

o Reporting possible supply 
routes used by insurgent 
forces. 

Augmenting patrols with 
attached interrogation assets 
can add to the patrol's ability 
to gather intelligence by 
interrogation or questioning 
of the local populace. 



Augmentation of native scouts 
familiar with the area provide 
an advantage. Again, 
communications and security are 
primary limitations to scout 
operations. 

GSR 

GSR missions in an LIC 
environment may include 
continued search of open 
areas or surveillance of 
point targets. GSRs are 
very effective when integrated 
into R&S plans for 
installations, bases, and 
airfield security. They can 
verify activity detected by 
other sources (such as OPs, 
REMBASS, NODs) or vector 
friendly patrols. 

The AN/PPS-5 and AN/PPS-15 
are currently found in MI 
battalions supporting airborne 
and air assault divisions. 
The AN/PPS-15 is found in 
light infantry division MI 
battalions. System use depends 
on the AO and the mission. 

GSR limitations include LOS 
to target. This is a key 
factor when insurgent activity 
occurs in forested or urban 
areas. 

Extremes in weather such as 
rain, wind, or snow will 
degrade their operations. 

AN/PPS-5 users must 
consider the system's weight 
if the mission is in rouen 
terrain or requires quicK 
movement. It weighs in 
excess of 110 pounds without 



11-34 



FM 34-2-1 



batteries, which are 12 
pounds each. 

REMBASS 

REMBASS is a valuable asset 
in the LIC environment. 
REMBASS gives indications on 
the amount of traffic along 
suspected insurgent trails; and 
it provides early warning when 
used along routes leading to 
possible insurgent targets or 
rriendly base camps. 

Sensors have a 24-hour, 
near all-weather capability. 
The information obtained cues 
the use of patrols, GSR, or OPs 
to confirm activity. 
Considerations when using 
remote sensors include radio 
LOS to the relay or monitoring 
station. The transmitting 
range is about 15 kilometers 
for sensors and repeaters, and 
up to 100 kilometers for 
airborne repeaters. 

VOICE COLLECTION TEAMS 

The MI battalion 
subordinate to heavy, light, 
air assault, and airborne 
divisions have voice collection 
teams capable of supporting the 
R&S effort. The AN/TRQ-32 
TEAMMATE and the AN/PRD-10 
provide IEW support. The 
QUICKFIX and GUARDRAIL (a corps 
MI brigade asset) can assist in 
the EW collection effort based 
on availability. 

The AN/TRQ-32(V)(I) 
(TEAMMATE) will intercept HF, 
VHF, and UHF communications. 



It provides VHF LOB data. The 
power of the intercepted signal 
and LOS determine range 
capability. Limitations to be 
considered include mobility of 
the prime mover and security 
for systems when operating 
outside a security oase. 

The AN/PRD-10/11/12 is a 
mobile radio DF system. It can 
operate as a single station 
providing intercept and LOB 
data. when operating in the 
net mode with three other 
stations, the AN/PRD-10 
provides intercept and manually 
computed radio DF fix locations 
of enemy transmissions. The 
AN/PRD-10 weighs approximately 
80 pounds; its range depends on 
LOb and the power of the 
intercepted signal. 

When available, the 
QUICKFIX or GUARDRAIL can 
conduct airborne DF. These 
systems have extensive range 
and can provide locations on 
enemy transmitters. 

Evaluate all available 
assets within the brigade or 
battalion capable of supporting 
the R&S effort. Some assets 
and their capabilities follow: 

o Helicopters resupply, 
insert, or extract patrols; 
they also conduct limited 
route and area reconnaissance. 

o The countermortar 
radar AN/TPQ-36 (DS to the 
artillery battalion) provides 
information on insurgent mortar 
locations. 



11-35 



FM 34-2-1 

o Patrols search suspect 
areas for mortar tubes and 
ammunition cache sites. 

o CI teams provide 
information on insurgent 
activities and their 
intelligence capabilities. 

Consider all human sources 
such as convoy truck drivers, 
FOs , and personnel from 
host-nation agencies or units 
(such as refugee camps, civil 
affairs checkpoints, local 



law enforcement, and 
intelligence.) 

Fighting in an LIC 
environment requires a 
continuous R&S effort. This 
effort stresses reporting 
information to the S2 and 
disseminating that information 
no matter how insignificant. 
It also involves the total 
force. IFig ure 11-27 
example or 

employed in a battalion R&S 
plan. 



is an 
how these assets are 



11-36 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure 11-27. Battalion R&S plan. 



11-37 



FM 34-2-1 

"A/ V V^ 



INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR BATTALION R&S PLAN 

(LIC) 

Scout Teams : Team 1 insert during darkness by POV or 
HMMWV. Check LZ A and conduct route reconnaissance along Axis 
Blue. Establish base at GSR position 1 and continue with four 
personnel to find enemy base camp vie 1111. Two personnel will 
return along Route Blue with sketches of enemy base and will 
guide attack force. The two personnel remaining at enemy base 
camp report activity and indications camp may move prior to 
attack. Pick-up point for personnel with sketches vie 612345 
(during darkness) . 

Team 2 insert during darkness same technique as team 1. 
Check LZ B and conduct route reconnaissance along Axis Red. 
Locate enemy base camp and provide sketches. Two personnel will 
remain to observe and report base camp activities. Establish 
pick-up point for personnel with sketches vie 222222 (during 
darkness) . 

Team 3 use same insertion technique at vie 333 333. 
Establish scout camp with GSR position 2. Set up OPs/LPs vie 
444444 and vie 555555. Report enemy movement in NAI 2 and also 
check LZ C. 



Team 1 move with scout team 1 and establish site vie 
666666. Report enemy patrol activity along river vie 777777. 
Vector scouts upon request. 

Team 2 move with scout team 3. Establish site vie 888888 to 
monitor bridge NAI 3 and NAI 2. Give priority to movement along 
river, then activity across bridge. 



Figure 11-27. Battalion R&S plan (continued). 

11-38 



FM 34-2-1 



CHAPTER 12 
ELECTRONIC WARFARE ASSET EMPLOYMENT 



Normally, division staffs 
and higher echelons plan for 
the use of IEW assets. 
However, you may be in a 
situation where you have MI 
unit assets either attached or 
in DS of your unit. In either 
case, you must be able to 
properly direct those assets 
in support of your R&S plan, 
as well as your unit's CR 
plan. To do that, you should 
understand— 

o The fundamentals of EW. 

o Who plays what role in 
EW planning. 

o What IEW assets are 
needed to help you answer your 
commander's rlR and IR and 
support the unit CR plan. 

FUNDAMENTALS 

IEW assets belonging to MI 
units do three things: " they 
provide combat information; 
they provide data which 
contributes to production of 
intelligence; and they give 
your unit an EW capability. 
EW should be a vital element 
of your unit's command, 
control, and communications 
countermeasures (C 3 CM) 
program. EW is one way 
commanders protect their 
electronic systems while 
attacking the enemy's 



electronic systems. Your 
staff should plan for use 
of EW within three broad 
mission areas: 

o Defend. 

o Degrade or disrupt. 

o Deceive. 

DEFEND 

The defend mission includes 
your use of electronic counter- 
countermeasures (ECCM) to 
protect your unit's electronic 
systems. ECCM includes proper 
use of signal operation 
instructions (SI)I), terrain 
masking, and proper radio and 
television operator procedures. 
FM 24-33 contains detailed 
information on ECCM. The 
defend mission also includes 
ESM to find and target enemy 
jammers and ECM to screen 
friendly communications from 
the enemy. 

DEGRADE OR DISRUPT 

You degrade or disrupt 
enemy electronic systems by 
targeting electronic emitters 
or jamming electronic 
receivers. Normally, the small 
number of jammers available to 
you forces you to be highly 
selective about which targets 
to disrupt. 



12-1 



FM 34-2-1 



The S3 is in charge of the 
degrade or disrupt mission. 
You must support this mission 
through intelligence and ESM 
which intercept, identify, and 
locate potential targets. 

DECEIVE 

Electronic deception is 
normally controlled by division 
or corps. Deceiving, or 
electronic deception, provides 
false information to the enemy 
through electronic devices. 
It is intended to induce the 
enemy into acting against 
their best interests. 
Deception is achieved by 
feeding false or misleading 
information to enemy electronic 
sensors; or by transmitting 
it directly into operational 
channels. (Normally, this 
is part of an overall deception 
plan.) Make sure that what 
the enemy collects 
electronically agrees with, 
or at least does not refute, 
the overall deception 
scheme. 

IEW systems collect combat 
information through ESM. 
Essentially, consider your 
IEW assets as one more source 
you can use to help answer 
your commander's rlR. However, 
you do not directly task this 
source, specify which assets 
do what, nor emplace these 
assets. You do specify what 
you want to know, and 
coordinate with your IEWSE and 



S3 to make sure your IEW assets 
do not interfere with your 
unit's scheme of maneuver. We 
will address this later in this 
chapter. 

More than likely, your IEW 
assets will spend significant 
time supporting or executing 
the EW degrade or disrupt 
mission. Look at this mission 
as consisting of two 
components: passive and 
active. ESM is the passive 
part. That is, your IEW assets 
work to collect information 
that will support the ECM, or 
the active part, of the 
mission. 

ECM consists of jamming and 
deception. Essentially, 
jamming delivers a hign level 
of power to an enemy receiver, 
preventing that receiver from 
receiving its intended 
transmission. Your IEW assets 
must radiate energy to do 
this. Therefore, they are 
susceptible to enemy 
countermeasures. 

Deception causes the enemy 
to misinterpret what is 
received by electronic 
systems. Once again, your 
IEW assets (and any other 
assets you choose to use) 
must transmit to deceive. 
Therefore, deception is 
active as well. More 
detailed descriptions of EW 
are in FM 34-1, Chapter 5. 



12-2 



FM 34-2-1 



PLANNING 

Your S3 is in charge of 
planning and using EW. The S3 
is responsible for integrating 
EW into your unit's scheme of 
maneuver. However, it is the 
FSO who must intergrate EW 
into the overall fire support 
plan. This becomes especially 
important for suppression of 
enemy air defense operations. 
You must support your S3's EW 
plan by carefully selecting ESM 
priorities. (The S2 should 
assist the S3> with EW 



planning.) 
breakdown 
~.iW planning. 



Figure 12-1 1 
breakdown of who does what in 



is a 



Finally, the IEWSE officer 
is the resident expert on your 
MI unit IEW assets. The IEWSE 
officer-- 

o Recommends use. 

o Coordinates physical 
placement. 

o Acts as liaison between 
you and the assets. 

o Coordinates EW planning. 

o Recommends EW support for 
fire and maneuver. 

Your unit has four 
electronic options to attack 
enemy electronic systems: 

o Intercept. 

o Locate. 

o Jam. 

o Deceive. 



Intercepting provides 
combat information and 
technical data on the enemy's 
electronic systems as well as 
raw data for processing into 
intelligence. Technical data 
supports jamming and electronic 
deception. 

The locating option 
provides approximate locations 
of enemy radio and radar 
antennas. This aids in the 
use of directional antennas 
for jamming, and may be used 
with other information to 
provide targe ting-quality 
data. 

Jamming disrupts the 
receipt or exchange of orders 
and oattlefield information. 
It can delay the enemy long 
enough for the commander to 
exploit a situation that 
otherwise would have been 
corrected. Jamming provides 
a nonlethal alternative or 
supplement to attack by fire 
and maneuver. It is we 11- 
-suited for targets that cannot 
be located with targeting 
accuracy, or that only require 
temporary disruption. 

As a general rule, you 
will want to destroy or jam 
enemy electronic systems 
located near your PLOT. 
Enemy communications systems 
located farther back will 
normally be used by enemy 
planning elements. Therefore, 
they may be more valuable as 
,a source of, information. 



|Figure 12-2| is a list of 
electronic options listed by 
enemy echelon and distance from 
the FLOT. 



12-3 



FM 34-2-1 



S3 



FIRE SUPPORT OFFICER 



C-E OFFICER 



S2 



IEWSE OR Ml UNIT 



-Friendly situation-electronic deception 
-Planned operations-ECCM 
-ECM target priorities 
-EW HPT identification 



-Fire support integration 
-EW HPT identification 



-MIJI feeder report identification 
-Taboo, protected frequencies 
-ECM support to ECCM 
-Effects on friendly ECCM planning 
-Electronic deception 



-ESM priorities 
-Enemy situation 

-Enemy capabilities 
■HVT identification 
-EW HPT identification 



- Electronic OB or EPB 
-Asset tasking 
-Asset status 
-Technical data 
-Effectiveness assessments 



Figure 12-1. EW employment coordination requirements. 



12-4 



FM 34-2-1 



O 

Li. 



z 

Z LU 

o z 
o o 

LU LU 
W Q 

CVJ 



z 

3 

LU 

X 

o 

LU 



Z 
< CL 

O 



A 

• o 

: UJ 

d >. 



^ o 

O i- 
10 



o 



o 



8 
o 



o 

CM 



O 
CM 



10 



10 



O 

H 
CO 



CO 
CO 



CO 

o 



O 
<r 

LU -g* 

si 



CL 

o 



a. 

g 



0. 
O 



Z Q 



~ LU 

^ Q 



~ LU 



IS 

S Q 



« LU 

2 Q 



LU 

o 

Q 



LU 

O 
Q 



LU 

o 



I 

Q 



LU 

s 



LU 

§ 



LU 

Q 



LU 

8 



~ LU 

16 
z o 



z 
< 



o o 
o o 



g 

Q 



LU 
Q 



^ 



LU 



LU 



< o 

CO 

Q 
, Z 
DC < 



& 



LU 

o 
o 



O 

Q 



LU 

Q 



8 



I 



LU 

8 



LU 



a. 
o 



a. 
p 



a. 
p 



a. 
O 



a. 
p 



LU 



LU 

§ 

Q 



LU 

8 



LU 
CO 

z 

LU 
U_ 
LU 
Q 

DC 

< 



LU 

5 



LU 

Q 



Q 



LU 
O 

z 

LU 




i 



LU 

§ 

o 



Q. 

g 



a. 
O 



Q. 

1 



Q. 
O 



LU 

8 



LU 

8 



LU 

8 



LU 

8 



S 

LU 



LU 

8 



CO 
GC 

LU 
LU 

Z 



Z 
LU 



Q. 
O 



Q. 

o 

z- 



Q. 

1 



Q. 

i 



Q. 

1 



LU 

Q 



O 

tr 
ii. 



LU 

X 

o 

LU 

O 
CVJ 



Z 

3 

LU 

X 

o 

LU 

& 



Q. 



O 
CO 



o 

CO 



o 

_CM_ 



o 

CM 



10 



10 



O) 



CO 



tr 



2 u 

o z 

a o 

z u 

2 > 

z ffi 



CD 

P 

CO 



CO 

o 



£ CO 
DCLU 
CL CT 



Ico 

QC LLJ 
Q.GC 



LU 

§ 

o 



I 



LU 

Q 



I 

Q 



UJ 

8 



2 
O 
<r 
u. 

uj-p- 
Q§ 






LU 

8 



z 
< 

< Q 



LU 

8 



LU 



LU 

8 



LU 

8 



(5 



6 

O 

_i 

CO 

z 
o 

CL 



Figure 12-2. Electronic options. 



LU 

§ 

Q 



UJ 



§ 

Q 



UJ 

8 



LU 

8 



CO 
DC 
LU 

< 

5 

o 
o 



c 
■d 



8 

x: 



a) 

x: 

c 

ts 

ctj 
c: 
o 
o 

O) 

c 

■D 
Q) 

£ 
a) 

c 

CtJ 

x: 
o 

c 
.Q 

S. 
o 

a> 
a) 






12-5 



FM 34-2-1 



EW planning follows the 
normal staff planning process. 
It begins with the mission and 
commander's guidance. During 
the planning process, your 
staff determines electronic 
HPTs . You then divide your 
electronic HPTs into four 
categories: 

o Targets located for 
destruction (targeting). 

o Targets to be jammed. 

o Targets to be intercepted 
for combat information or 
intelligence. 

o Targets to be deceived. 

WHAT TYPE OF INTELLIGENCE 

AND ELECTRONIC WARFARE 

ASSETS ARE NEEDED? 

Once you have categorized 
your electronic HPTs, you need 
to have a way to tell your IEW 
assets what you want them to 
do. Do this by providing your 
IEW assets a list of priorities 
on a target list worksheet. 
Remember to include both ESM 
(passive) and ECM (active) 
priorities. 

STAFF ACTIONS 

You and other staff 
officers determine ESM and 
ECM priorities by war gaming. 
Remember that ESM must support 
ECM. ESM may also help you 
answer the commander's FIR. 

Your S3 ultimately 
determines ECM priorities 
(based on staff input). 
The S2 determines— 



o ESM priorities based on 
your commander's PIR and IR. 

o The S3's ECM priorities. 

o When and where on the 
battlefield the PIR, IR, and 
ECM become most important. 

The IEWSE officer relays 
your unit's ESM and ECM 
priorities to your attached 
or supporting IEW assets. 
Figure 12-3 is an example of 
a completed EW target list work 
sheet. It shows how you can 
synchronize those priorities 
to support the DST. In this 
example, identifying and 
locating enemy reconnaissance 
units of the 141st MRR is the 
number one ESM priority because 
the commander's top PIR 
initially is to locate enemy 
reconnaissance units. 

The second and third ESM 
priorities are to identify and 
locate divisional and 
regimental air defense assets. 
Note that the first ECM 
priority is to jam divisional 
air defense nets. In this 
case, the third ESM priority 
supports the first ECM 
priority. Your EW assets 
cannot jam those nets without 
first finding them. 

Obviously, the first ECM 
priority reflects that CAS is 
important to the success of 
the mission; and jamming enemy 
divisional air defense nets 
supports the planned CAS 
mission. If you compare the 
target list work sheet to the 
DST, you will see the 
relationship between ESM and 



12-6 



FM 34-2-1 



EW TARGET LIST WORKSHEET 


PRIORITY 


TIME 
WINDOW 


TARGET 
UNIT 


TARGET 
LOCATION 


TARGET 
ACTIVITY 


CONTROL 
MECHANISM 


FEEDBACK AND 
COORDINATION 


ESM 


ECM 


1 




310600Z 

to 
311200Z. 


Regimental 
recon 
company, 
141st MRR. 


Probable 
screening 
NB865343 to 
NB741372. 


Reporting 
movement 
from OP to OP. 
Reporting spot 
rept. 




Report by 
location. 


2 




310600Z 

to 
311300Z. 


Regimental 
air Defense 
battery, 
141st and 
142d MRRs. 


From 

NB842340 to 
NB627385 to 
NB625522 to 
NB868418. 


Report 

occupying 

positions. 




Identify and 
location. 


3 


1 


ESM311200Z to 
311400Z. 
ESM start: 
Approx311345 
for 10 min. 


Divisional air 
defense 
regiment, 
39th GMRD. 


From 

NB625372 to 
NB868478. 


Report 
occupying 
positions, and 
operational 
status of acquir- 
ing aircraft. 


Positive 
control , 
spot, and 
jam. 


Identify and 
locate ECM 
effectiveness. 



H-1 



"\H 



H+1 



H+2 



H+3 



DECISION SUPPORT TEMPLATE 



INTEL 



PIR 1-RECON 141. 
PIR2-REGT ADA. 



PIR 1 - REGT ADA. 
2-DIVADA. 



PIR1-DIVADA. -JAMDIV. 
2-MAINDEF. ADA NET. 



PIR 



1- MAIN DEF. 
2-ITB. 



MANEUVER 



SCOUTS 
OUT 



SPTF-141 
TF-39 



FIRE SUPPORT 



PREP GROUP 
FIRE 1 X2,TAI#1 



-STRIP ALERT ARTYTAI 2 
3xA7 



SEADTAI#3 PREP FIRE 
CASTAI#3 GP3 x 4 



ADA 



YELLOW TIGHT 



RED FIRE 



YELLOW HOLD 
CORRIDOR "BABBALOO" 



MOBILITY AND 
COUNTER MOBILITY 



ENGINEER FORWARD 
RECON PRIORITY 



1. MOBILITY 
2.COUNTERMOBILITY 
3. SURVIVABILITY 



1-C/MOB 
2-SURVL 



TAC FORWARD 



TAC ASSUMES CONTROL 
MAIN DISPLACE 
RETRANS OUT 



CSS 



TOP OFF 
AMMO DISTR 



DISPLACE 
TRAINS 



LD/LC 



LOA 




TAI 1 



LD/LC 




PL FRED 



PL ETHEL 



LOA 



Figure 12-3. EW target list worksheet. 



12-7 



FM 34-2-1 



ECM priorities and how the unit 
intends to fight the battle in 
time. 

ELECTRONIC WARFARE TARGET 
LIST WORKSHEET 

Specifics of the EW target 
list worksheet follow: 

o Time window is the time 
you want your assets to spend 
looking for the target; or the 
start/stop times you want your 
assets to jam the target. 

o Target unit is the 
specific unit or target you are 
looking for. The more specific 
you are, the easier it is for 
your IEW assets to find it. 

o Target location is where 
you expect the target to be. 
Location can be based on actual 
information or on situation 
templates. 

o Target activity is the 
specific type of communications 
you want collected or jammed. 

o Control mechanism is how 
you want the target unit to be 
jammed (such as spot jamming, 
barrage jamming). Your IEWSE 
can tell you more about the 
advantages and disadvantages of 
each type of jamming; and can 
recommend which kind will best 
support your mission. 

o Feedback and coordination 
is exactly what you are looking 
for; for example, location and 
identification of the target 
and effectiveness of jamming. 
Check with your S3 to see what 
kind of feedback is required. 



Again, your IEWSE can help in 
this area. 

TARGET LIST WORKSHEET: 

RECONNAISSANCE 
AND SURVEILLANCE PLAN 

An EW target list worksheet 
is the equivalent of an R&S 
plan for your IEW assets. It 
tells your assets what they 
should look for, when they 
should look for it, and what 
and when to jam. The EW target 
list worksheet should be a 
total staff effort among you, 
the S3, the FSO, and the IEWSE. 

Remember, you should not be 
concerned with the details of 
how to collect the information, 
such as which specific asset 
should do what, and where each 
asset should go. Those details 
are left to the attached or 
supporting MI unit and your 
IEWSE . Simply tell them what 
you want, and let them figure 
out how best to do it. 

You must, however, make 
certain that the emplacement 
of your IEW assets does not 
interfere with your unit's 
mission. Therefore, make sure 
your IEWSE coordinates all IEW 
positions with your S3. Also, 
remember to continually monitor 
those IEW positions so that 
they do not get overrun or 
outdistanced by maneuver units. 

Keep your IEWSE updated on 
the enemy frontline trace; and 
insist on frequent status 
reports on your IEW assets. 
Figure 12-4 is a list of 



organic or supporting M 
by echelon. Figure 12- 



MT 



units 
is 



12-8 



FM 34-2-1 



ELECTRONIC WARFARE UNITS 


ECHELON 


Ml ORGANIZATION 


MAJOR EW UNIT 


EWSUBUNIT 


CORPS 


BRIGADE 


Ml BN (TE) 

Ml BN (TE) (RC) 

Ml BN (AE) 


EWCO 

EW CO (COLL) AND 

EWCO(ECM) 

AVN CO (EW) 


HEAVY DIVISION 


BATTALION 


C&J CO 
EW CO 


C&J PLATOON SIGINT 
PROCESSING PLT 
QUICKFIX FLT PLT 
(OPCON) 


LIGHT DIVISION 


BATTALION 


COLL CO 


VOICE COLL PLT 
QUICKFIX FLT PLT 
(OPCON) 


AIR ASSAULT 
DIVISION 


BATTALION 


HHOC 
C&J CO 


QUICKFIX FLT PLT 

C&J PLT AND 

NONCOMM PLT 


AIRBORNE 
DIVISION 


BATTALION 


C&J CO 


C&J PLT AND 
NONCOMM PLT 
QUICKFIX FLT PLT 
(OPCON) 


ACR 


COMPANY 




C&J PLT 
QUICKFIX FLT PLT 
(OPCON) 


SEPARATE 
BRIGADE 


COMPANY 




COLL PLT (VOICE) 
VHF ECM PLT 



Figure 12-4. Supporting IEW units by echelon. 



12-9 



FM 34-2-1 



8 


E 


< 


E 


S 


D 


LU 


C 


ec 






cc 




a. 



UJO 

38 





8 HI 

>,^ Q.CO 
C _C0 



CD 

a 

2 



CO 

£ 

D 
■D 
CD 



c 

'€ 
o 

a 

£ 

■D 
CD 
A 
™ 
O 
CO 
CD 



I 

o 



J 

E 

CD 
O 

S 

o 

CD 

a 

CO 

1 

■D 

CD 



c 
5 

CD 
CO 

Q. 



Q. 



2 O 

UJUJ- 

>« o 

CO o 



LU LU « 



LU 
> 
LU 
O 
LU 

a 



TK 

O 

is 

O 

2 



< 






& 

z 

LU 

3 

o 

LU 

CC 



ec 

m LU 



LU 

0- 



0. K 






if 

o < 

2< 





CO S 

IS 



E 

CO CD 
2 CO CO LU 



gc 

Q. 



12-10 



Figure 12-5. Electronic attack options. 



FM 34-2-1 

an electronic attack options FM 34-40 provides a detailed 

chart. Figure 12-6 shows discussion of EW operations. 

IEWSE officer responsibilities. 



1. Integrates IEW missions with brigade operations. 

a. Ensures collection and jamming missions support the 
commanders intent, concept of operations, scheme of maneuver, 
and fire support plan. 

(1) LOS analysis for initial deployment locations, 
specifically: 

(a) High ground for C&J. 

(b) LOS from jammers and collectors to target 
(NAI) . 

(c) LOS between collectors for netting. 

(d) LOS from jammers and collectors to C3 sites 
for reporting. 

(2) LOS analysis for subsequent redeployment locations 
in accordance with overall tactical scheme of maneuver. Same as 
above . 

b. IEWSE officer studies brigade OPORD with special 
attention to items above, especially unit boundaries and phase 
lines. 

c. Coordinates with brigade S2s to identify specific PIR, 
IR, and NAI to confirm or deny enemy COAs, with special 
attention to — 

(1) How the S2 estimates enemy COAs to develop. 

(2) Templated enemy forces and IPB. 

(3) Probable indicators and enemy forces expected to 
deploy at each NAI. 

(4) Associated enemy emitters and electronic clusters 
at each NAI. 

(5) Probable time line(s) . 

(6) Type nets and frequencies (technical control and 
analysis element) . 



^V VA V\ ' V 

12-6. Brigade IEWSE officer responsibilities. 12-11 



FM 34-2-1 

— x/ V v^ \ 

(7) Location of specific collection assets to cover 
specific NAI above. 

(8) Impact of weather on operations. 

d. Coordinates with S2 to ensure collection operations 
reflect commander's specific PIR and IR; and are synchronized 
with the overall R&S plan, with special attention to — 

(1) Unit scouts, patrols, OPs/LPs. 

(2) GSRs. 

(3) REMBASS. 

(4) Division long-range surveillance units. 

(5) Cavalry operations. 

(6) USAF reconnaissance. 

(7) Interrogation of prisoners of war and CI. 

(8) Fire support. 

e. Coordinates with brigade S2 and brigade 
communications-electronics staff officer (CESO) to ensure 
current brigade challenge and password is passed to MI battalion 
S3. 

f. Coordinates with brigade S3 to ensure IEW operations are 
synchronized with brigade scheme of maneuver, with special 
attention to — 

(1) Locating jamming assets to serve as an effective 
combat multiplier as part of overall scheme of maneuver and fire 
support plan. 

(2) Coordinating operational sites and fallback 
positions with maneuver elements. 

(3) Coordinating times and routes for deployment or 
redeployment. 



""V V \Ar 



Figure 12-6. Brigade IEWSE officer responsibilities (continued). 

12-12 



FM 34-2-1 

-^v Va v^ \j 

(4) Planning redeployment of MI ground C&J assets by 
bounding as part of overall scheme of maneuver. 

(5) Planning integration of airborne QUICKFIX to cover 
times and locations not covered by ground assets. 

g. Coordinates with brigade S4 for logistic support, with 
special attention to — 

(1) Attachment of MI assets , as appropriate. 

(2) Roll up of all MI battalion assets operating in 
brigade ACR, from MI battalion S3 and S4. 

h. Coordinates with brigade CESO for — 

(1) Proper CRYPTO fill and frequency for brigade 
operations and intelligence (O&I) net. 

(2) Protected frequencies to prevent electronic 
fratricide. 

(3) Deconfliction of IEW operational and C3 sites with 
signal units. 

(4) Location of jammers. 

(5) Relays. 

i. Coordinates with brigade FSO for — 

(1) Deconfliction of IEW operational and C3 sites with 
fire support units. 

(2) Fire support planning to avoid engagement areas. 

(3) Family of scatterable mines (FASCAM) targets. 

(4) Use of tactical fire direction computer system 
(TACFIRE) net to pass sanitized reports quickly. 

(5) Fire support radar locations. 

(6) Protective fires to cover withdrawal of IEW assets, 
as required. 

*V \h V^ \ 

Figure 12-6. Brigade IEWSE officer responsibilities (continued). 



12-13 



FM 34-2-1 

-"V V ^ \ 

j . Coordinates with brigade engineer for — 

(1) Location of current or planned mine fields and 
obstacles. 

(2) Brigade classifications. 

(3) Route reconnaissance. 

(4) River crossing -sites and classification, 
k. Coordinates with brigade ADA officer for — 

(1) Deconfliction of IEW operational and C3 sites with 
ADA units. 

(2) FAAR locations. 

(3) QUICKFIX air corridors, loiter times, and 
locations. 

(4) Identification, friend or foe (IFF) (radar) . 

(5) Current ADA weapons control status and location. 
1. Coordinates with brigade NBC officer for — 

(1) Current contaminated areas. 

(2) Planned NBC targets. 

(3) Smoke and obscurant employment. 

m. Coordinates with brigade MP officer for current 
condition and status of routes, traffic control measures, and 
support to the reconnaissance, intelligence, surveillance, and 
target acquisition (RISTA) effort. 

n. Coordinates with brigade ALO for — 

(1) Timely in-flight reports. 

(2) Latest weather updates. 

(3) Current and planned air and ground engagement 
areas. 



^ V NA \r 

Figure 12-6. Brigade IEWSE officer responsibilities (continued). 



12-14 



FM 34-2-1 
""V V \A 



2. Assists the brigade S2 in formulating the EW annex of the 
brigade OPLAN and OPORD. 

3. Serves as a critical liaison officer between MI battalion 
and the maneuver brigade. 

a. Keeps the MI battalion S3 informed of above data from 
brigade staff. 

b. Serves as functioning member of brigade orders group. 

c. Provides copies of maps and overlays from brigade orders 
group . 

d. Monitors brigade O&I net and brigade command net for 
latest developments. 

e. Notifies MI battalion S3 in a timely manner of all 
brigade developments and redeployments. 

4. Keeps brigade commander and staff informed of latest 
intelligence depicting the enemy situation: 

a. Monitors tasking and reporting net for tactical reports. 

b. Sanitizes tactical reports and passes combat information 
to brigade commander and staff in 15 minutes or less from time 
of receipt. 



Figure 12-6. Brigade IEWSE officer responsibilities (continued). 



12-15 



FM 34-2-1 



APPENDIX A 

MANAGEMENT TOOLS FOR 
RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEILLANCE OPERATIONS 



This appendix contains the 
following checklists, formats, 
and reports used in planning 
and supervising R&S missions. 
NOTE : This appendix can be 
reproduced ana used in the 
field as a pocket guide. 



o 



Figure A-l. Example 



of an intelligence estimate 
in matrix format. 



o 
matrix. 



Figure A-21 R&S tasking 



o 



Figure A-3|. Different 
versions of the K&S tasking 
matrix. 



o 
check 



Figure A-4. R&S 



1S1 



NOTE : The purpose of the 
R&S checklist is to make 
sure complete coordination 
is conducted for all R&S 
operations. 



o 



plan format. 



Figure A-5| . Collection 



o 



Figure A-6| IEW Asset 



redeployment matrix. 



o 
sance 

o 
plan. 

o 
report 



Figure A-7, Reconnais- 



asset utilization matrix. 
A patrol 



Figure A-8 



Figure A-9 
format. 



Patrol 



o [Figure A-T0| . Hints 
on debriefing patrols. 



o Figure A-1J| . UbK 
or REMBASS plan format. 

GSR 



o 



Figure A-12 
or REMbASS briefing 
checklist. 



o 



Figure A-l! 



collection asset 



Standard 
request 



format (SCARF) basic format. 

Mission 



o 



Figure A-14. 



report format. 



A-l 



FM 34-2-1 



AS OF CURRENT INTELLIGENCE ESTIMATE 



1. Weather: For period from 

BMNT from to . EENT from 

Sunrise . Sunset 



to 



to 



Temp from 



to 



Winds: Speed from 



to 



knots. Direction 



Night operations: Skies cloudy clear. % of moon ilium 
Trafficability: Poor good excellent. 
Precipitation: Snow rain sleet hail. 

Maximum precipitation per month inches. 

Average precipitation per month inches. 



Terrain: From 



to 



Observation and fields of fire: 

Concealment and cover: 

Obstacles: 

Key terrain 

Decisive terrain: 
Other key terrain: 

Avenues of approach: 

Other: 



"\A 



-\A- 



\A 

Figure A-1. Example cf intelligence estimate in matrix format 



v 



A-2 



■^nA 



AA 



3 . Enemy in brigade sector 
Map sheets: 
Intelligence overlay: 



AA- 



FM 34-2-1 



V 



Committed forces: 



Reinforcements : 



Recent activities: 



Strengths : 



Weaknesses: 



Enemy frontline trace: 



Second line of defense: 



Probable courses of action: 



Enemy NBC: 



Possible Probable 
Next 



Imminent 
hours. 



Figure A-1. Example of intelligence estimate in matrix format (continued). 



A-3 



FM 34-2-1 



DTG- 
(CLASSIFICATION) MISSION. 


PRIORITY 
(matches 
PIR no) 


NAI 
(grid) 


START 
STOP 


SIR 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E and AT 








COORDINATION 


REPORTS 






























(CLASSIFICATION) 

NOTE: A maneuver battalion S2 or S3 tasking subordinate units would change SIR to SOR. 
S2s use this matrix to coordinate and manage the R&S effort. 



Figure A-2. R&S tasking matrix. 



A-4 



FM 34-2-1 



BRIGADE R&S TASKING MATRIX 


UNIT 


PRIORITY 


NAI 


LOCATION 


REPORTING REQUIREMENT 


REMARKS 


TASKING 


EVENT OR INDICATOR 














BRIGADE OR BATTALION R&S TASKING MATRIX 


PRIORITY 


NAI 


LOCATION 


REPORTING REQUIREMENT 


COLLECTION UNIT 
OR ASSETS 


REMARKS 


EVENT OR INDICATOR 

































Figure A-3. Different versions of the R&S tasking matrix. 



A-5 



FM 34-2-1 



I. Planning Process. 

A. Initial Requirements: 

1. Did higher headquarters provide tasking 
requirements? 

2. Was the commander's PIR and IR stated and included? 

3 . Did the commander provide R&S intent? 

A. Did the S2 brief the staff on enemy collection 
capabilities? 

5. Were other staff tasks performed? 

B. SIR Developed (IPB Driven) : 

1. Did S2 identify air or ground AAs? 

2. Do situation and event templates reflect probable 
or prioritized enemy COAs? 

3. Was NAI developed in detail? (What is expected? 
When? Where?) 

4. Were collectable indicators at NAI developed? 

5. Were SIR developed from NAI and indicators? 

6. Were reporting requirements developed for priority 
collection missions to allow the commander time to change plan? 

C. Possible Collectors Analyzed: 

1. Did S2 coordinate with staff, S2, and G2 to 
identify all available collection assets? 

2. Did S2 analyze asset capabilities to develop 
collection requirements based on range to target, time 
available, target characteristics, terrain, weather, enemy 
(obscurants use) , and communication? 

3. Did S2 analyze collection redundancy (is it 
necessary) ? 



"V ^ NA Y 

Figure A-4. R&S checklist. 



A-6 



FM 34-2-1 

-"V V \h — — \- 

4. Did staff identify support requirements 
(communication nets, retransmission, fire support, logistic 
support, special equipment support)? 

5. Did S2 identify gaps in collection? 

6. Did S2 backbrief S3 or the commander on R&S 
concept? 

7. Were warning orders sent to appropriate assets? 

8. What were timelines? 

a. When was mission received? 

b. What is NLT for execution? 

c. When was templating done? 

d. When was tentative plan made? Backbrief ed? 

e. When were warning orders issued? 

f . When was initial reporting needed? 

g. Who was in charge of R&S planning? 
h. Who was in charge of CR planning? 

II. Preparation for R&S Operations. 

A. Specific Collection Instructions: 

1. What assets were available? Used? 

a. Scouts. 

b. GSR. 

c. Patrols. 

d. OPs/LPs. 

e . FOs . 

f . infantry, 

-^V V s NA \* 

Figure A-4. R&S checklist (continued). 



A-7 



FM 34-2-1 

— V 



— V v, A- 

g. Armor. 



h. AT. 

i. Aviation. 

j . Engineer. 

k. Signal. 

1. Cavalry. 

m. EW. 

n. MP. 

0. Other. 

2. Did the S2 provide detailed instructions to tasked 
assets? Did the instructions include — 

a. Who is tasked? 

b. What to look for? 

c. Why to look? 

d. When to look? 

e. Where to look? 

f. What you could expect to see? 
g. How to get there? 

h. Who to coordinate with? 

i. Passage of lines and recognition signals? 

j . Reporting requirements? 

k. Friendly assets in AO? 

1 . Resupply? 

m. Obstacles? 

— ^ ^ ^ A 



Figure A-4. R&S checklist (continued). 



A-8 



FM 34-2-1 

— N/ V v^ \ : 

n. MEDEVAC? 

o. NBC hazards? 

3. Was the collection location appropriate 
(concealment, collectable) ? 

4. Were there sufficient control measures included to 
control assets during mission? 

5. Did the S2 request assistance from higher 
headquarters for identified collection gaps? 

6. Did the R&S plan cover all collection requirements? 

7. Were assets overtasked? 

8. Was redundancy appropriate for this mission? 
B . coordination : 

1. What is format of plan (collection plan, overlay, 
matrix. )? 

2. Were direct or indirect fires or jamming 
coordinated between staff and S2? 

3. Was a CI vulnerability assessment made? 

4. Was additional equipment (special) planned for? 

5. Were communication nets established to meet 
reporting needs? 

6. Were commanders and staff briefed on plan before 
execution? 

7. Did commander or S3 approve final plan? 

8. Did assets know specific requirements (PIR and IR) ? 

9. Was plan disseminated to all involved or those with 
a need to know (FRAGO, overlay)? 

10. Was plan sent to higher headquarters? 



^V V s \A -\r 

Figure A-4. R&S checklist (continued). 



A-9 



FM 34-2-1 

— 'V V \f, \< 

C. Asset Internal Coordination: 

1. Was equipment checked? 

2. Were internal procedures clarified? 

3 . Did coordination between assets occur? 

4. Was mission rehearsed? 

5. Was plan developed far enough in advance for assets 
to prepare or rehearse? 

6. Was plan developed in time for higher headquarters 
to review? 

III. Execution. 

A. Continuity of R&S and CR Operations: 

1. Did unit plan provide for operations when scout or 
other R&S assets are inoperable? 

2. Did unit SOP provide for operations during 
briefings, debrief ings, or rehearsals? 

3. Are units and leaders cross trained to facilitate 
substitutions or replacement of scouts? 

B. Asset and Unit Response: 

1. Did assets depart and set up on time? 

2. Did assets use concealment, cover, and camouflage? 

3. Were assets able to observe enemy undetected? 

4. Was low-level deception used? 

5. What were meteorological report requirements? 

6. Were enemy locations pinpointed? 

7. Was objective reconnoitered? 



^v Vx v^ V 

Figure A-4. R&S checklist (continued). v 



A-10 



FM 34-2-1 

^ V^ \A \j 

8. Were obstacles identified and marked? 

9. Were routes marked? 

10. Was enemy reconnaissance located? 

11. Were CR missions performed? 

12. Did assets help with C2 during attack? 

13. Did assets help direct or control fires? 

14. Was terrain reconnoitered? (Trafficability 
reported?) 

C. Reporting: 

1. Were reports timely, accurate, and concise? 

2 . Were assets debriefed? 

D. Results: 

1. Did S2 plot asset reports (track results of plan)? 

2. Did S2 identify inadequately tasked or unproductive 
assets and change tasking (with approval of commander or S3)? 

3 . Did reports or analysis answer PIR and IR? 

4. Was R&S plan updated and recoordinated? 

5. Were templates updated? 

E . Dissemination : 

1. Was commander briefed on answer to PIR? 

2 . Has commander updated PIR? 

3. Did units get intelligence based on priority? 

4. Did higher headquarters get answers to taskings? 

5. Did assets receive feedback on level of success? 



Figure A-4. R&S checklist (continued). 



A-ll 



FM 34-2-1 



Mi 



%? 



3Q8 Wl NH 



0C6 9Q0 



K6 vao 



J-30 IN N8 I 



o 

U U. K 



I 



K 2 



O (0 






fi;ii 



Kill 



111 




o 

g50| 



* CM 



a c 



2 « 

c 2 

o 
G 



U tu 

8 8 



K i 



III 



1 



NOTE: Normally used at division and above, however, it can be modified for use at the brigade or battalion. 



Figure A-5. Collection plan format. 



A-12 



FM 34-2-1 



ASSET POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 REMARKS 



• FINAL CROSSING SITES(S). 

• OPCON OR ATTACHMENT. 

• FINAL OBJ COORDINATION. 

• CHALLENGE AND PASSWORD. 

• PHASE LINE TIMING. 



Note: This matrix is filled in by the IEWSE officer. Other staff officers refer to this to find out 
where the assets are deployed or where they will deploy. 



Figure A-6. Redeployment matrix for IEW assets. 



A-13 



FM 34-2-1 



SQUADRON or BATTALION: 



Date:. 



A check indicates asset 
named was employed in 
the listed task. 

Tasks 



Objective Locate enemy positions 

Locate objective obstacles 
Breach or mark obstacles 
Establish objective OP 
Direct fires 
Assist C 2 

Route Locate screen 

Locate route obstacles 
Breach or mark obstacles 
Mark assault route 
Mark Infiltration route 
Establish route OP 
Perform terrain reconnaissance 
Determine trafficability 
Provide timely communications 

Other Reconnoiter beyond objective 

Establish screen 



Assets 




NOTE: Taken from the Rand study. Can be used as a tool to ensure all available assets 
are used in R&S operations. 



Figure A-7. Reconnaissance asset utilization matrix. 



A-14 



FM 34-2-1 



1. Patrol number. 

2. Task organization and effective time. 

3. Mission (PIR and IR included). 

4. Start time. 

5. Completion time. 

6. Action upon enemy contact. 

7. Action at obstacles. 

8. Location of friendly minefields and barriers. 

9 . Routes . 

10. SP, RP, passage points , and checkpoints. 

11. Fire support. 

12. Organization and communication frequency for reporting 

13. Actions upon completion of mission. 

14 . Special instructions . 



Figure A-8. Patrol plan. 



A-15 



FM 34-2-1 



Patrol reports are prepared by the S2 section based on 
information reported by the patrol during debriefing. All 
pertinent information is included in the report to ensure 
completeness. The report is then disseminated in accordance 
with appropriate SOP. 

(DESIGNATION OF PATROL) 

TO: 

MAPS : 

A. Size and composition of patrol. 

B. Mission. 

C. Time of departure. 

D. Time of return. 

E. Routes out and back. 

F. Terrain: (Description of the terrain: dry, swampy, jungle, 
thickly wooded, high brush, rocky; deepness of ravines and 
draws; condition of bridges as to type, size, and strength; 
effect on armor and wheeled vehicles.) 

G. Enemy: (Strength, disposition, condition of defense, 
equipment, weapons, attitude, morale, exact location, 
movements, and any shift in disposition; time activity was 
observed; coordinates where activity occurred.) 

H. Any map corrections. 

I. (Not used. ) 

J. Miscellaneous information (including aspects of NBC 

warfare) . 

Results of encounters with enemy: (Enemy prisoners and 

disposition, identifications, enemy casualties, captured 

documents, and equipment.) 
L. Condition of patrol (including disposition of any dead or 

wounded) . 
M. Conclusions and recommendations (include to what extent the 

task was accomplished and recommendations as to patrol 

equipment and tactics) . 



K. 



Signature Rank Unit of Patrol Leader 

N. Additional remarks by interrogator. 



Signature Rank Unit of Interrogator Time 

0. Distribution. 



Figure A-9. Patrol report format. 



A-16 



FM 34-2-1 



1. Make the subject comfortable. 

2. Debrief orally. 

3. Debrief as soon as possible. 

4. Do not ask leading questions. 

5. Make sure PIR and IR are given to the patrol before it goes 
out. 

6. Was intelligence accurate? If not, what were the 
inaccuracies? 

7. Was the map accurate? If not, what were the inaccuracies? 

8. If aerial photos were used, was the imagery analysis 
accurate? 

9. What was the condition of trails? Did the trails show 
signs of recent use? 

10. Were rivers or streams crossed or followed? 

11. What were stream and river conditions. 

12. Give location of the following and were they in recent use? 
o Bridges, by type. 

o Fords. 

o Roads, trails. 

13 . Local contacts : 

o Name of village, city, or town. 

o Number, location. 

o Were they friendly? Indifferent? Hostile? 

o Was there any previous government contact? 

o Have they moved recently? If so, why? 

o Did they give any information? 

"V/ \^ Vs \ 

Figure A-10. Hints on debriefing patrols. 



A-17 



FM 34-2-1 

^ VA \A \ 

14. Enemy contacts: 

o Where and when. 

o Number, race, and sex? 

o How were they dressed? 

o Were they carrying packs? How were they armed? 

o Activity? If moving, in what direction? 

o Any equipment or documents recovered? 

o Casualties (own and enemy)? 

o Enemy casualties identified? Disposition of bodies? 

o Any prisoners or crossovers? 

o Any observed (detected) ground or airborne R&S or other 
intelligence collection activity? 

15. Camps: 

o Where, when, and how was camp discovered? 

o How sited? How many huts or buildings? 

o What type? How long ago were they built? 

o In use? Food dumps? 

o Defenses constructed? Approach and escape routes? 

o Weapons, ammunition, or tools? 

o Signs of radios having been used? 

o Electricity? Generators? Used batteries? 

o Documents? 

o Printing press? Copiers? Used carbon paper? 

o What was done with the camp? 

— ^ VA \a \j 

Figure A-10. Hints on debriefing patrols (continued). 

A-18 



FM 34-2-1 

-^ ^ ^ A^ 

16. Cultivated areas: 

o Time, date, location of discovery? 

o Size and shape? 

o Was camouflage attempted? 

o What crops? 

o How old? Signs of harvesting? 

o When last tended? 

o Signs of habitation? Tools? Machinery? 

o Trails in area? 

o What was done to the cultivation? 

Figure A-10. Hints on debriefing patrols (continued). 



A-19 



FM 34-2-1 



1. Mission. 

2. Time required to be operational. 

3. Routes to GSR site or REMBASS emplacement areas. 

4. Location of primary or alternate and subsequent GSR sites 
and REMBASS strings and fields. 

5. Left and right scan limits of GSRs in mils; point target 
location. 

6. Withdrawal routes to subsequent GSR sites. 

7. Location of friendly minefields and barriers. 

8. Action upon enemy contact. 

9. Passage points and checkpoints. 

10. Fire support planning. 

11. Organization and communication frequency for reporting. 

12 . Special instructions . 



Figure A-11. GSR or REMBASS plan format. 



A-20 



FM 34-2-1 



1. 


Friendly and enemy situation. 


2. 


Mission. 


3. 


Maps, photos, overlays. 


4. 


Expected targets (type) . 


5. 


Required reports. 


6. 


Reporting procedures. 


7. 


Communications . 


8. 


Security. 


9. 


Food service. 


10. 


Maintenance support. 


11. 


Sensor emplacement sites. 


12. 


Monitoring sites. 


13. 


Mission security implant. 


14. 


Proposed radar site locations. 


15. 


Surveillance sectors. 


16. 


Operation periods and schedules. 


17. 


MEDEVAC. 


18. 


Passage of lines. 



Figure A-12. GSR or REMBASS briefing checklist. 



A-21 



FM 34-2-1 



STANDARD COLLECTION ASSET 
REQUEST FORMAT 

Asset managers use the 
standard collection asset 
request format (SCARF) for 
intelligence requirements 
tasking and for requesting 
information from higher or 
adjacent headquarters. At 
corps and division, 
intelligence requirements 
tasking is directed toward MI 
commanders and commanders of 
other elements of the combat 
force capable of collecting the 
information. 

Intelligence requirements 
tasking provides the selected 



unit with a specific 
requirement, but not with 
specific instructions for 
carrying out the mission. The 
SCARF tells you- 

o What information is 
needed. 

o Where to look for the 
movers, shooters, sitters, and 
emitters. 

o When to look. 

o When the information is 
needed. 

o What to look with (in 
some cases). 



A-22 



FM 34-2-1 



A. Requester number. 

B. Originator priority. 

C. Activity or target type (area emitter and size [point, 
areas, or unit] ) . 

D. BE number, ELINT notation or case. 

E. Location (if known or last known). 

F. Duration: 

o Start date-time. 

o Frequency. 

o Stop date-time. 

o Latest acceptable date-time for information utility. 

G. Location accuracy: 
o Required. 

o Acceptable. 
H. PIR and IR desired. 
I . Justification. 
J. Remarks (include disciplines and collectors recommended). 



Figure A-13. SCARF basic format. 

A-23 



FM 34-2-1 



JOINT TACTICAL AIR 

RECONNAISSANCE AND 

SURVEILLANCE REQUEST 

FORM (DP Form 1975) 

This form is used to 
request a joint tactical air 
reconnaissance or surveillance 
mission. The form states 
requirements, identifies needs, 
and, occasionally, specifies 
the actual air asset to perform 
the mission. 

Any echelon initiates the 
request. It is used for both 
immediate and preplanned 
mission requirements. The 
requestor completes section 
1 of the request for each 
specific mission. Normally, 
these requests are transmitted 
by electrical means. The 
headquarters receiving the 
request adds information 
required to validate or 
complete the request. 
Obtain PP Form 1975 through 
your SI. 



MISSION REPORT 

Air units include strike or 
attack, reconnaissance or 
surveillance, airlift, 
observation, and helicopter. 
Air units use the mission 
report to report the results of 
all missions and significant 
sightings along the route of 
the flight. 

The mission report 
amplifies the inflight report 
and is normally submitted 
within 30 minutes after 
aircraft landing to-- 

o The tasking agency. 

o The requesting unit or 
agency. 

o Other interested 
organizations. 

When the EW air task or 
mission is completed, 
intelligence personnel conduct 
a briefing and submit a mission 
report. 



A-24 



FM 34-2-1 



HEADING 

PRECEDENCE 

ORIGINATING AGENCY 

ACTION ADDRESSEES 

INFORMATION ADDRESSEES 

SECURITY CLASSIFICATION/CODE 

MISSION REPORT ( Number ! DATE-TIME GROUP 

BODY 

1. AIR TASK/MISSION NUMBER OR NICKNAME . Reference the request 
number, FRAGO number, or directive causing initiation of the 
mission. 

2. LOCATION IDENTIFIER . Target number, line number, approved 
target designator/identifier, or coordinates of the target or 
sighting being reported. 

3. TIME ON TARGET/TIME OF sighting . Report all times by 
date-time group, using ZULU time unless otherwise directed. 

4. RESULTS /sighting i nformation . This item should contain the 
pilot and aircrew evaluation of expected results (for example, 
percent destroyed, number and type destroyed, or percent of 
coverage) . It should contain concise narrative information on 
significant sightings (for example, unusual or new enemy 
equipment or concentrations of enemy forces observed to include 
number, speed, and direction [if applicable]). 

5. REMARKS . Includes information not specifically mentioned in 
above items (for example, enemy defenses encountered? weather 
data; hostile meaconing, intrusion, jamming, and interference 
attempts) . 



Figure A-14. Mission report format. 



A-25 



FM 34-2-1 



APPENDIX B 

EXAMPLE OF THE RECONNAISSANCE 
AND SURVEILLANCE PROCESS 



The objective of R&S 
planning is the collection of 
information the commander needs 
in order to fight and win the 
battle. Planning results in 
the coordinated efforts of all 
intelligence resources 
integrated into one collection 
effort. 

PLANNING PROCESS 

The planning process 
includes-- 

o Determining requirements. 

o Assigning priorities. 

o Allocating the resources 
to satisfy each requirement. 

This appendix will assist 
commanders and staffs in 
understanding the process used 
to develop, implement, and 
execute an R&S operation. 

The process described in 
this appendix is a deliberate 
one which can be used when 
sufficient time is available. 
In a hasty planning process, 
the procedures can be 
modified. Most of the products 
described here will not be done 
formally; but the steps 
involved should still be 
applied mentally. 



MANEUVER BRIGADE SCENARIO 

The following is the 
scenario for a maneuver brigade 
in a high-intensity conflict. 

COL Link Gayagas, 
Commander, 1st Brigade, 52d 
Infantry Division (Mech), had 
just received the divisions 
OPORD. Based on the division 
commanders concept of 
operations and intent, COL 
Gayagas knew his brigade was in 
for a hard time in 
accomplishing the mission. The 
brigacTets mission is to conduct 
a supporting attack in the 
southern zone of the division's 
AO. 

The brigade is to seize 
defensible terrain. This will 
allow the division to prepare 
for a defense and destroy a 
reinforcing combined arms Army 
soon to be committed. To 
support the division's main 
attack, the division commander 
wants the brigade to draw the 
commitment of the 41st guards 
motorized rifle division's 
(GMRD) reserve, the 35th tank 
regiment (TR), into the 
brigadets zone. The 35th TR is 
the only threat to any major 
drive by the 52d Infantry 
Division to the north. 



B-l 



FM 34-2-1 



While still at the division 
OPORD briefing, COL Gayagas 
took advantage of a short break 
to instruct the brigade S3, MAJ 
Booth, to call the origade TOC 
and give them a warning order 
for the upcoming mission. MAI 
Booth provided the brigade TOC 
with the type mission, 
boundaries, and the brigade's 
objective, as assigned by 
higher headquarters. This was 
to allow the staff to begin 
work on the mission, 
particularly the S2 who needed 
the additional time to develop 
the intelligence products to 
support the brigade's IPB 
process. 

MAJ Baker, the brigade's 
S2, immediately began to 
orchestrate the intelligence 
system to support the upcoming 
mission. He directed SGT 
Hockins, the section 
intelligence analyst, to 
develop an MCOO of the AO; and, 
for initial planning purpose, 
to include in the MCOD the 
analysis of the AI extending 5 
kilometers to the flanks and 10 
kilometers forward of the AO. 
MAJ Baker also directed his 
assistant, CPT Roberts, to call 
the G2 shop or division 
operations and intelligence 
(O&I) and get as much 
information as possible on the 
enemy situation. 

By the time the brigade 
commander returned from the 
division OPORD meeting, MAJ 



Baker had developed a good idea 
of the enemy situation; and 
since he understood the 
informational requirements 
associated with the type 
mission assigned, he was ready 
to support the brigadets 
decision-making process. 

BRIGADE PLANNING 

The brigadets planning 
staff was assembled quickly 
upon the return of the 
commander. COL Gayagas 
provided all the information he 
had that was not published in 
the OPORD. He also provided 
the higher commander's intent 
and guidance, insights, and 
concerns, along witn some 
available options. 

COL Gayagas was 
particularly concerned about 
the brigade's ability to create 
a situation which would force 
the enemy motorized rifle 
division 5 (MRD) commander to 
commit his reserve into his 
brigade sector. He knew he had 
to find an enemy weakness and 
exploit it quickly; to do that, 
he needed detailed information 
on the enemy disposition. COL 
Gayagas gave MAJ Baker the PIR: 

1. What is the 15th guards 
motorized rifle regiment (GMRR) 
defensive disposition? 

2. Is there a weakness in 
the 15th GMRR defensive 
disposition? If so, where? 



B-2 



FM 34-2-1 



3. Where are the artillery 
battalions comprising the 15th 
GMRR regimental artillery 
group? 

4. Will the 41st GMRD 
commander direct any of his 
gunships against 1st Brigade? 
If so, when? 

5. Where and when will the 
35th TR be committed? 

6. Will the enemy employ 
chemical munitions against 1st 
Brigade? If so, when and 
where? 

COL Gayagas provided his 
planning guidance, stressing 
his PIR. He left his second 
in command, LTC Larcom, to 
initiate the planning process 
and coordinate those staff 
actions requiring operating 
system integration. LTC Larcom 
provided each staff element 
with its corresponding portion 
of the division OPORD. 

He informed the staff they 
had two hours to go through 
the mission analysis process 
in their respective area of 
responsibility and to be back 
at the end of those two hours 
to review the results of their 
analysis. 

S2 ANALYSIS PROCESS 

With the commanders PIR 
in hand, MAJ Baker began to 
develop the products needed 
to support the accomplishment 
of the mission. When MAJ Baker 
arrived at his 577, CPT Roberts 
and SGT Hockings were refining 
the initial situational 



template. They were comparing 
their product to the OB 
holdings on the enemy unit 
facing 1st Brigade. MAT Baker 
informed CPT Roberts he had 
received the division's 
intelligence products and 
commander's rlR and needed him 
to assist in the mission 
analysis process. 

They both understood the 
higher commanders intent and 
knew the informational 
requirements associated with 
the offensive operation beine 
conducted by the brigade. They 
completed the mission analysis 
process as it pertained to the 
intelligence system. MAJ Baker 
was about to leave to meet with 
the orders group to present the 
result of his analysis. He 
took with him the MCOO and the 
enemy sit uation template. 
Figure B-H shows an MRR 
situation template (based on a 
prepared defense). He 
instructed CPT Roberts to start 
developing the brigade R&S 
plan. 

CPT Roberts began his 
efforts by analyzing the 
commander's PIK. Using the 
enemy situation template, CPT 
Roberts took the PIR and began 
to associate them with 
indicators of enemy COAs. At 
the same time, he identified 
those PIR which could be 
satisfied with organic, 
assigned, or attached 
collection assets; and those 
PIR for which he would have to 
submit an RII to higher 
headquarters. The PIR analysis 
conducted by CPT Roberts 
reflected: 



B-3 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure B-1. MRR situation template based on a prepared defense. 



B-4 



FM 34-2-1 



PIR: What is the 15th GMRR 
defensive disposition? 

INDICATOR: 

3 x MRCs with a total 
of 8 to 10 BMP-2's, and 
2 to 3 T-64B'sper MRC, 
all in prepared 
fighting position or in 
assembly area. 

Main obstacle array 
from 800 meters to 
1,000 meters forward of 
the MRC prepared 
fighting positions. 

8 to 12 T-64B's in an 
assembly area. 

2 to 3 BMP-2's forward 
1 to 3 kilometers of 
main defensive position 
with possible 
protective type 
obstacle. 

1 BMP-2 or BMP-1 BRDM 
forward and isolated 
from any additional 
forces. 

5 to 7 BRDM-2 f s, 
mounting 5 AT-5 
Spandrel AT guided 
missiles in assembly 
area, possible mine 
layer with 1 BTR 
included. 

PIR : Is there a weakness 
in the 15th GMRR defensive 
disposition? If SO, where? 

INDICATOR: 

- Distance between MRCs 
greater than 2,000 meters. 



- No impeding type 
obstacle within the main AA. 

- Location of tanks 
within MRC positions. 

- No tanks with second 
echelon forces. 



Location of MRR 



reserve. 



PIR: Where are the 
artillery battalions comprising 
the 15th GMRR regimental 
artillery group? This PIR will 
also serve as an RII to higher 
headquarters and will 
facilitate the integration of 
ECM support by the IEWSE 
officer to support the scheme 
of maneuver. 

INDICATOR: 3 x 5 t o 8 
2Sl's or 2S3's on line, located 
off a major A A or MC. 

PIR: Will the 41st GMRD 
commander direct any of their 
gunships against 1st brigade? 
If so, where? This PIR will 
serve as an RII to higher 
headquarters. 

PIR : Where and when will 
the 35th TR be committed 
against 1st brigade? This PIR 
will also serve as an RII to 
higher headquarters for initial 
acquisition and tracking. 

INDICATOR: 60 to 70 
T-64B's moving southeast from 
NAI 90 to NAT 16 and NAI 18. 

PIR : Will the enemy use 

chemical munitions against 1st 

brigade? If so, when? This 

PlK will serve as an RII to 



B-5 



FM 34-2-1 



higher headquarters for initial 
indication of intent to employ. 

INDICATOR: 

- Break off activities 
of enemy forces in contact. 

- Enemy troops wearing 
protective overgarment. 

DEVELOPMENT OF SITUATION 
TEMPLATE AND EVENT TEMPLATE 

Concurrently with the 
development of the indicators, 
CPT Roberts began to identify 
NAI that, when defined by the 
indicators, would form tne 
basis and focus of the brigade 
R&S efforts. CPT Roberts' 
event analysis process was 
developed to ascertain the 
defensive COA as it relates to 
the reconnaissance and security 
echelon and the 2d echelon 
motorized rifle battalion (MRB) 
and MRR reserve. This is 
outlined in the brigade SOP. 
The first echelon MRBs 
defensive COA was given to the 
task forces to develop, as 
assisted by the brigade S2's 
enemy situation t emplate and 
event template. |Figure B-2 



shows an event template. 



Figure B-3| is a combined 
situation template and event 
template. 

SPECIFIC R&S GUIDANCE 

When MAJ Baker returned 
from the meeting he had the 
tentative brigade plan to 
accomplish the mission. He 
informed CPT Roberts of the 
brigade's scheme of maneuver 
and provided him additional R&S 
instructions based on the 



commander's concept of 
operations. COL Gayagas wanted 
a good reconnaissance of Axis 
Speed and Axis Kill (Annex A of 
the OPORD); and he wanted two 
OPs established: one 
overmatching OBJECTIVE CAT and 
the other OBJECTIVE DOG. 

MAJ Baker told CPT Roberts 
that since he now knew the 
brigadets scheme of maneuver, 
he had sufficient information 
to assign specific 
informational requirements to 
subordinates and attached units 
and complete the brigade R&S 
plan. CPT Roberts was also to 
develop the R&S tasking matrix, 
which is the tool used to 
disseminate R&S taskings to 
subordinate and attached 
units. He is to have the 
matrix ready within the hour so 
MAJ Baker could pass it through 
COL Gayagas for his approval 
and MAJ Booth for coordination. 

The following samples are 
the results of the brigade's 
mission analysis and 
decision-making process to 
develop the R&S plan. The 
sample is given along with the 
figure number assigned to it. 



o 



Figure B-4j Sample 



warning order. 



Figure B-5.1 Sample 



OPORD. 

A to OPORD 1-XX. 



Figure B-6. 



o 



B to OPU 



Figure B-7, 



gure 

SsdT. 



XX. 



Sample Annex 
Sample Annex 



o 



Figure B-8J A sample 
Appendix 3 to Annex B to OPORD 



w. 



B-6 



FM 34-2-1 



29 



pi! 

111!! 

HI: 



fe { v1 :: ^ 



Hi! 



!.--i:' ! i i: 'i-!-i=i 






IIIIIH 






liiiiil*::i!i!!fiiiil! 




Sllllllllllll 



iill 
i ! ; i|ll i" 




: ^C0{0^ : :^-^- ::: ^^0^ 



• " ',."' i '' ■ 



:ii:i:;-:::; : :;; ; ; ; : •;s; :: ;:::;:::: :: :: i;..,.;!::::^^^!:, =.v:. : : :.V=: =- i: ::j : IH- : : :-= : - :=:-.- "•= '•' ; ••••* 

lllllllllllllllllllll^ 

iilliliiillllilill 



!;=::i;;;=;;::i;:- "^ii^iii-ii ■=:;•• 

!i ! f:-' : '= :=.:!!;: J^;!:" 

; : -'" : " ■■■■. • 



: .v:O : :0i - 



iii^iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii 



: 



liiilillllllllill ! I ;. iiiii 



IllllllllllSlllllllllllllllllllllSllllil 



ilillllilliiiiiiili 



;!i-: :i! =!-?|>;; : ! 



ill 



|:!;; : C, '.•'•:!!■•■■:.:■ :■•.• 



=:• ,.:•=••■•:;!:•• • : :.- : = .•!==/ ••=::• ^--^v 
,.w.:.:.s.x.:. : .:.:. ! .:. iI Ji!l!i|i|!|!!i!lil!!H!!i!j!!!j!!!iij! 



•■ . :^:=:: . ; : /' : .": : ::= :l;; :: =:; : i;hiH^ =|jj!!;i=!!-=ii-:=j)!i:i : "V 

*^ - 




lllllliltlllll 
llillllllllllllllll 

■MM 



isiiiiiiiiiiiiii 



: 







43 



Figure B-2. Modified event template based on MRR situation template. 84 



B-7 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure B-3. Situation template and event template combined 
to form the foundation for the R&S plan. 



B-8 



FM 34-2-1 



WARNING ORDER 

TO: Orders Group ALPHA 

FROM: Commander, 1st Brigade 

ZULU Time = UNIFORM + 7 

SITUATION : The 41st GMRD is defending in prepared positions 



from AB448098 to AB362456. The 41st GMRD has not established a 
security zone; expect subordinate MRRs to establish combat 
security outposts. 

ATTACHMENTS AND DETACHMENTS : Team l/l/2/B/104th MI OPCON to TF 



1-10 (Mech) ; Team 2/l/2/B/104th MI OPCON to TF 1=12 (Mech) 
effective 310500Z Aug XX. 

EARLIEST TIME OF MOVE : Main body movement from assembly area 



will be NET 012300Z Sep XX. Order of movement will be 
designated at OPORD. 

NATURE AND TIME OF OPERATIONS : Brigade, 52d Infantry Division 



(Mech) destroys enemy in zone (012245Z Sep XX) to force the 
commitment of the 41st GMRD reserve in 1st Brigade Zone. On 
order, seize OBJ Watch (AB2635) to facilitate the advance of 
follow-on forces. R&S activities will commence NLT 311701Z Aug 
XX. 

TIME AND PLACE OPORD ISSUANCE : 1st Brigade OPORD will be issued 



at brigade TOC vicinity AB621180 at 310700Z Aug XX. Orders 
group ALPHA will attend. 

Acknowledge. 



Figure B-4. Sample warning order. 

B-9 



FM 34-2-1 



Copy of Copies 

1st Bde, 52d ID (M) 
(Location) 
310700Z Aug XX 

OPORD 1-XX 

Reference : Omitted 

Time Zone Used Throughout Order: ZULU (UNIFORM + 7). 

Task Organization: Omitted 

1. SITUATION. 

a. Enemy Forces: Annex B (Intelligence) . 

b. Friendly Forces: 

(1) 52d ID (Mech). Attacks to destroy the 41st GMRD 
and seize defensible terrain from AB255385 to AB145135 NLT 
012245Z Sep XX. On order, defend in sector to destroy the 9th 
CAA. The Div Cdr intent is to force the commitment of the 41st 
GMRD reserve into 1st Brigade Zone to allow the division main 
effort in the north to quickly penetrate deep into the MRD 
sector and rapidly destroy the enemy; and allow the Div more 
time to prepare the defense to destroy the 9th CAA. 

(2) 2d Brigade. Division main effort in the north.... 

(3) 3d Brigade. Follow and support 2d Brigade.... 

2. MISSION. 

1st Brigade, 52d ID (Mech) attacks 012245Z Sep XX to seize 
OBJ CAT (AB4014) and OBJ DOG (AB4011) to destroy enemy in zone 
and force the commitment of 41st GMRD reserve into 1st Brigade 
Zone. On order, continue the attack west to seize OBJ WATCH 
(AB2 635) . Be prepared to conduct a hasty defense on OBJ CAT and 
DOG to destroy the 41st GMRD's counterattack. 

3. EXECUTION. 

a. Concept of Operations. Annex A of the OPORD. I see 
this as a multiphase operation. First, the reconnaissance 
phase: I want an aggressive R&S effort conducted to ascertain 
the disposition of the 15th GMRR. I want to find their 



■^ V v^ V 

Figure B-5. Sample OPORD. 



B-10 



FM 34-21 

-^^ v^ \a ^H 

obstacles, to be able to take advantage of any weaknesses and 
avoid his strength, I need R&S assets deep to track the 41st 
GMRD reserve (the 35th TR, counterattack force) once it is 
committed in my zone. The second phase is from the LD to the 
objectives (CAT and DOG) . TF 1-10 will be the main attack on 
Axis Speed; TF 1-12 will conduct the supporting attack in zone. 
TF 3-68 will be the Bde reserve. I want TF 1-12 to cross the LD 
at 012245Z Sep XX and the rest of the Bde crossing 15 minutes 
later. TF 1-12 will draw the 15th GMRR reserve to counterattack 
into its zone to facilitate TF 1-10 efforts to unhinge the enemy 
defense from the north quickly. We will clear enemy in zone; no 
enemy force platoon size or larger will be bypassed. I will 
interdict enemy disposition with the fire support assets then 
destroy them with overwhelming combat power. We cannot allow 
the enemy to slow our attack. The third phase will be the 
destruction of the 41st GMRD reserve. Once TF 1-10 and TF 1-12 
seize OBJ CAT and DOG, and the 41st GMRD initiates its 
counterattack, TF 3-68 will pass through TF 1-10 and 
counterattack into the flank of the 41st GMRD reserve and 
destroy the enemy. The last phase is to continue the attack 
west to facilitate the Bde's follow-on defensive mission. 

(1) Maneuver. 1st Brigade conducts this mission in 
four phases. 

(a) Phase 1: Reconnaissance and surveillance. 

(b) Phase 2: TF 1-10, initial main effort; 
attacks on Axis Speed at 072300Z Sep XX to seize OBJ CAT 
(AB4014), to destroy enemy in defensive position; occupies 
Attack Position #1 NLT 012200Z Sep XX; LD is PL Space. TF 3-68 
follows TF 1-10 as the Bde reserve. TF 1-12 occupies Attack 
Position #2 NLT 012200Z Sep XX, conducts supporting attack at 
012245Z Sep XX, to destroy enemy in zone and seize OBJ DOG, in 
an effort to force the commitment of the 15th GMRR reserve into 
OBJ DOG (AB4011) to support TF 1-10 attack on OBJ DOG. 

(c) Phase 3: On order, TF 3-68 becomes the main 
effort and counterattacks on Axis Kill to destroy 41st GMRD 
reserve (35th TK Regt (-) ) ; TF 1-10 suppprts TF 3-68 by fire, to 
fix enemy in engagement area RED (AB395165) . TF 1-12, be 
prepared to support TF 3-68 and TF 1-10; on order, TF 1-12 
becomes the Bde reserve. 

(d) Phase 4: 1st Bde conducts a deliberate 
defense on OBJ WATCH NLT 022400Z Sep XX, 1st Bde defends in 
sector with two TFs abreast — TF 1-10 (North) and TF 1-12 
(South) — and TF 3-68 in reserve. 

1 ^ \sA \j\ \j 

Figure B-5. Sample OPORD (continued). 

B-ll 



FM 34-2-1 

^ V^ \A \j 

(2) Fires. See Annex — (omitted) 

(3) Obstacles, Mines, and Fortification. See 
Annex — Omitted 

(4) IEW. I want an aggressive R&S effort. My first 
requirement is to have a good description of tlie enemy's 
offensive posture and find out if he is deploying any security 
forces forward. The S2 will coordinate and supervise the 
effort. The S3 will integrate my EW requirements through the 
IEWSE. I want EW support in locating the 41st GMRD, and 15th 
GMRR reserves. I want jamming support directed against the 15th 
GMRR artillery resource and integrated into the Bde's scheme of 
maneuver to support our movement onto the OBJs. Additionally, I 
need jamming support directed against C J nodes between the MRB 
in the south and the 15th GMRR. This will support their belief 
that my main effort will be in the south. 

b. Subordinate Units Subparagraphs. 

(1) Combat Arms Unit. Omitted 

(2) Fire Support. Omitted 

(3) Air Defense, Aviation, Engineer, MI. Omitted 

(4) Reserve. Omitted 

(5) Coordinating Instruction. 

(a) PIR Phase 1: 

1 What is the 15th GMRR defensive disposition 
and obstacle array? 

2 What is the identification and location of 
the artillery battalions comprising the 15th GMRR regimental 
artillery group? 

3 Where is the 15th GMRR reserve located? 

(b) PIR Phase 2: 

1 What is the identification and location of 
the artillery battalions comprising the 15th GMRR regimental 
artillery group? 

— \/ \^ v, \ 

Figure B-5. Sample OPORD (continued). 

B-12 



FM 34-2-1 

— xy Va v< \ 

2 Where and when is the 15th GMRR reserve 
being committed? 

3 Where is the 35th TR located? 

4 Will the enemy employ chemical munitions 
against 1st Bde? If so, when? 

(c) PIR Phase 3: 

1 Where and when is the 35th TR being 
committed? 

2 Will the enemy employ any of their gun 
ships against 1st Bde? If so, when? 

3 Will the enemy employ chemical munitions 
against 1 Bde? If so, when? 

(d) TF's R&S plans: Required at Brigade by 
311400Z Sep XX. 

4. SERVICE SUPPORT. Omitted 

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL. Omitted 

Acknowledge. 



GAYAGAS 
COL 

OFFICIAL 



(SIGNED) 
S3 

Annexes: A - Operations Overlay. 
B - Intelligence: 

APP 1 — Enemy Situation Overla y ( Figure B-l|) 



APP 2 — Event and R&S Overlay d Figure B-2| ) . 
APP 3 — R&S Tasking Matrix. 



Figure B-5. Sample OPORD (continued). 

B-13 



FM 34-2-1 




Figure B-6. Sample Annex A to OPORD 1-XX. 



B-14 



FM 34-2-1 



ANNEX B (INTELLIGENCE) TO 1st BDE OPORD 1-XX 

Reference: Basic OPORD. 

1. SUMMARY OF ENEMY SITUATION. 

a. Enemy Situation (See Appendix 1, Enemy Situation 
Overlay) . 

(1) Composition or Disposition. Elements of the 41st 
GMRD are in prepared defensive position from AB373856 to 
AB448098. 41st GMRD is part of the 8th CAA's second defensive 
echelon. The 41st GMRD is dispositioned with 3 MRRs (15 G, 37 
G, and 60 G) on line and the 35th TR, as the reserve. Committed 
forces against 1st Bde are shown on Appendix 1. Reinforcement 
is limited to the 35th TR. Known location for 41st GMRD's 
artillery battalions are 15th GMRR at AB3812; 37th GMRR at 
AB3720; and 60th GMRR at AB3635. The 37th TR artillery 
battalion is currently in support of the 41st GMRD DAG. 

(2) Strength. 41st GMRD elements are presently at 60 
to 70 percent strength in equipment and personnel, 41st GMRD's 
reconnaissance is believed to be at less than 50 percent. 

(3) Enemy Capabilities. 41th GMRD and the 8th CAA are 
not capable of resuming offensive operations. The 385th Fighter 
Bomber Regiment of the 37th TAA can fly 1 to 2 sorties of MIG 27 
Flogger Ds or SU-25 Frogfoot, in support of the 8th CAA. The 
41st GMRD has the capability of employing 2 battalions of 122 mm 
(2S1) , 2 battalions of 152 mm (2S3) , and 3 batteries of 120 mm 
mortars against 1st Bde. Nuclear and biological attacks are 
possible, but not likely. The enemy has used persistent and 
nonpersistent chemical agents previously, and is likely to do so 
again. The 41st GMRD has the capability to counterattack with 
the 37th TR to blunt 52d ID (Mech) attack. Units at all levels 
should expect local counterattacks. 

(4) Most Probable Course of Action. The 41st GMRD will 
continue to defend to allow the 9th CAA sufficient time to 
deploy and assume offensive operations. The 15th GMRR defending 
within the 1st Brigade zone of attack will defend with 2 MRBs in 
the first echelon and 1 MRB in the second echelon. The TB has 
been broken up to reinforce the first echelon MRBs. The 15th 
GMRR reserve (counterattack force) consists of the TB HQs and 
one TK Company. The AT Missile (AT-5) Battery will be used as a 



"N/ V^ \A V 

Figure B-7. Sample annex B to OPORD 1-XX. 



B-15 



FM 34-2-1 
— ^ ^ NTS \ 

mobile reserve, with the possibility of one of its platoons sent 
to reinforce one of the first echelon MRBs. Although, there is 
no MRD-level security zone, expect combat security outposts 
forward of each first echelon MRB. Expect enemy artillery fire 
to commence as soon as the brigade moves across the LD. Enemy 
will use nonpersistent chemical munitions mixed in with their 
initial artillery fires, to slow and disrupt the brigade 
movement. Enemy use and intent for their obstacles will be to 
channelize the Bde and impede our movement within their 
established kill zones and fire sacks. 

2. INTELLIGENCE REQUIREMENTS. 

a. PIR: see Coordinating Instruction, basic order. 

b. IR: 

(1) Has the 15th GMRR deployed combat security 
outposts? If so, where and what size? 

(2) Where is the 15th GMRR and AT missile battery? 

(3) Where are the 15th GMRR obstacles? 

3. INTELLIGENCE ACQUISITION TASKS. 

a. Subordinate and Attached Units: See Appendix 3. 

b. Request to Higher, Adjacent, and Cooperating Units: 

(1) Will the 41st GMRD employ NBC attacks? 

(2) What enemy REC locations are in 1st Brigade zone? 

(3) When will the 37th TR be committed in 1st Brigade 

zone? 

4. MEASURES FOR HANDLING PERSONNEL, DOCUMENTS, AND MATERIALS. 

5. DOCUMENTS AND/OR EQUIPMENT REQUIRED. Omitted. 

6. CI AND OPSEC. Commanders will emphasize dispersion, 
camouflage, noise and light discipline, and COMSEC. 



^ v^ 



-A* V 



Figure B-7. Sample Annex B to OPORD 1-XX (continued). 

B-16 



FM 34-2-1 
— X/ V s V< \ 

7. REPORTS AND DISTRIBUTION. Subordinate Units R&S Plans - 
submit NLT311400Z Aug XX. 

8. MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUCTION. Omitted. 
APPENDIXES : 

1 - Enemy Situation Overlay 

2 - Event and R&S Overlay 

3 - R&S Tasking Matrix 



Figure B-7. Sample Annex B to OPORD 1-XX (continued). 

B-17 



FM 34-2-1 



(CLASSIFICATION) 



R&S TASKING MATRIX 



UNIT 
TASKING 



TASK FORCE 
1-10 

1. Recon Axis 
Speed. 



2. Establish OP. 



3. Recon. 



PRI- 
ORITY 



4. Recon 

5. Recon 



6. Recon 



"\A 



NAI 



67 



61 



LOCATION 



See R&S 
overlay 



AB427185 



AB410150 



REPORTING REQUIREMENT 



EVENT AND INDICATOR 



61A 



63 



65 



AB400163 



AB390133 



AB390150 



Conditions that affect trafficability and 
maneuverability. Obstacle type, size, 
and orientation. 



Surveillance of activities on OBJ CAT. 



3 MRP's with 8 to 10 x BMP-2s, in 
prepared fighting positions: 
Obstacle array 800 to 1,000 m forward 
ofMRC position. 



Alternate position for MRC at NAi 8. 



3 MRPs with 8 to 10 x BMP2s, 
prepared fighting positions: Obstacle 
array 800 to 1000m forward of MRC 
position. 



8 to 12 x T64B's in assembly area. 



REMARKS 



Report as obtained. 



Establish position NLT 
311900 AUG XX. 



Report all occupied or 
unoccupied fighting 
positions. Obstacles: 
report type, size, and 
orientation NLT 
010200Z Sep XX. 



A<A 



(CLASSIFICATION) 



A/V 



Report all occupied or 
unoccupied fighting 
positions. Obstacles: 
report type, size, and 
orientation NLT 
010200Z Sep XX. 

Possible MRR reserve. 
Report NLT010200Z 
Sep XX. 



v 



Figure B-8. Sample Appendix 3 to Appendix B to OPORD 1-XX 



B-18 



FM 34-2-1 



-^>- 



AA- 



(CLASSIFICATION) 



R&S TASKING MATRIX 



A^ 



UNIT 



TASKING 



PRI- 
ORITY! 



NAI 



LOCATION 



REPORTING REQUIREMENT 



EVENT AND INDICATOR 



REMARKS 



TASK FORCE 
1-12 

1. Recon. 



2. Establish OP. 



3. Recon. 



4. Recon. 



5. Recon. 



TASK FORCE 
3-60 



Establish flank 
screen oriented 
north, northwest. 



43 



60 



62 



AB501098 



AB416099 



AB408105 



1 BRDM or 1 BMP-2. 



Surveillance of activities on OBJ DOG. 



3 MRP's with 8 to 10 EMP-2s, in prepar- 
ed fighting positions: Obstacle array 
800 to 1 ,000 m forward or MRC position, 



MRR recon company 
element. Report as 
obtained. 



Establish positions NLT 
311900 2 Aug XX. 



Report all occupied or 
unoccupied fighting 
positions. Obstacles: 
report type, size, and 
orientation NLT 
010200Z Sep XX. 



62A 



64 



AB384098 



AB379118 



Alternate positions for MRC at NAI 8. 



3 batteries with 4 to 6 2S1 x 2S3s 
on line, located off a major avenue of 
approach or MO 



Report all positions NLT 
010200Z Sep XX. 



AB360160 

to 
AB413370 



60 to 70 x T64B's moving southeast 
from NAI 16 (AB380192) and NAI 18 
(AD362184) heading towards NA1 10 
(AB370162) or NAI 20 (AB360125). 



(CLASSIFICATION) 



Coordinate passage or 
flank screen element 
with TF 1-10. 
Establish screen NLT 
OHOOOZSepXX. 



Figure B-8. Sample Appendix 3 to Annex B to OPORD 1-XX (continued). 



B-19 



FM 34-2-1 

GLOSSARY 

AA avenue of approach 

AAA antiaircraft artillery 

ACR armored cavalry regiment 

ACRV a type Soviet equipment 

ADA air defense artillery 

AE aerial exploitation 

AF Air Force 

AI area of interest 

ALO air liaison officer 

AM amplitude modulated 

ammo ammunition 

AO area of operations 

APC armored personnel carrier 

approx approximately 

arty artillery 

ASC armored scout car 

ASPS all-source production section 

AT antitank 

attn attention 

AVLB armored vehicle launched bridge 

avn aviation 

AZ Arizona 

BAE battlefield area evaluation 

bde brigade 

BE basic encyclopedia 

bide building 

BLUFOR Blue Force (US) 

BMNT beginning of morning nautical twilight 

BMP a type of Soviet personnel carrier 

bn battalion 

BOS battlefield operating systems 

BRDM a type of Soviet equipment 

BRM a type of Soviet equipment 

BTR a type of Soviet equipment 



CAA combined arms army 

r 2 command and control 

^ command, control, and communications 

C 3 CM command, control, and communications 

countermeasures 
C&J collection and jamming 

CANE Combined Arms in a Nuclear /Chemical 

Environment 
CAS close air support 

cdr commander 

C-E Communications-Electronics 



Glossary-1 



FM 34-2-1 



CESO 
them 
CI 

CM&D 
C/MOB 

CO 

COA 

Coil 

Comm 

COMSEC 

con 

counter- 

reconnaissance- 

CP 

CPT 

CR 

CSS 

CUCV 

DA 

DAG 

DC 

DD 

decon 

def 

det 

DF 

DIA 

dist 

div 

DIVARTY 

DS 

DST 

DTG 

DZ 

E 

ECCM 

ECM 

EENT 

ELINT 

engr 

EPB 

EPW 

ESM 

EW 



communications-electronic staff officer 

chemical 

counterintelligence 

collection management and dissemination 

countermobility 

company 

course of action 

collection 

communication 

communications security 

contact 

all measures taken to prevent hostile 
observation of a force, area, or place (DOD) 
command post 

captain 

counterreconnaissance 

combat service support 

commercial utility cargo vehicle 

Department of the Army 

division artillery group (Soviet) 

District of Columbia 

Department of Defense 

decontamination 

defense /defensive 

detachment 

direction finding 

Defense Intelligence Agency 

distribution 

division 

division artillery 

direct support 

decision support template 

date-time group 

drop zone 

east 

electronic counter-countermeasures 

electronic counter measures 

end of evening nautical twilight 

electronic intelligence 

engineer 

electronic preparation of the battlefield 

enemy prisoner of war 

electronic warfare support measures 

electronic warfare 



Glossary-2 



FM 34-2-1 



FAAR 

FASCAM 

FEBA 

FIST 

FISTV 

577 

FLOT 

fit 

FM 

FM 

FO 

FRAGO 

FSE 

FSO 

fwd 

G2 

GMRD 
GMRR 



5 



GSR 

H 

HF 

HHOC 

HMMWV 
HPT 

hr 

HUMINT 
HVT 

I&S 
ID 
IEW 
IEWSE 

IFF 

ilium 

MINT 

intcp 

intel 

IPB 

IR 

ITB 

ITR 



forward area alerting radar 

family of scatterable mines 

forward edge of the battle area 

fire support team 

FIST vehicle 

tracked operations vehicle (heavy division) 

forward line of own troops 

flight 

(with number) field manual 

frequency modulated 

forward observer 

fragmentary order 

fire support element 

fire support officer 

forward 

Assistant Chief of Staff (Intelligence) 

guards motorized rifle division 

guards motorized rifle regiment 

group 

general support 

ground surveillance radar 

the time hostilities commence 

high frequency 

Headquarters, headquarters and operations 

company 

high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle 

high payoff target 

headquarters 

hour 

human intelligence 

high value targets 

intelligence and surveillance 

infantry division /identification 

intelligence and electronic warfare 

intelligence and electronic warfare support 

element 

identification, friend or foe (radar) 

illumination 

imagery intelligence 

intercept 

intelligence 

intelligence preparation of the battlefield 

information requirements 

independent tank battalion 

independent tank regiment 



Glossary-3 



FM 34-2-1 



JAAT 
JTCG 

km 
km/h 

lbs 

LC 

LD 

LIC 

LOA 

LOC 

LOEA 

LOS 

LP 

LOB 

m 

m 

mae 
MAJ 

MC 

M/CM/S 

MCOO 

mech 

MEDEVAC 

METL 

METT-T 

MI 
MIJI 

min 

MOPP 

MP 

MR 

MRB 

MRC 

MRD 

MRP 

MRR 

MSR 

MTLB 



NAI 

NATO 

NBC 

NET 



Joint Air Attack Team 
Joint Test Command Group 

kilometer 
kilometers per hour 

pounds 

line of contact 

line of departure 

low -in tensity conflict 

limit of advance 

lines of communications 

limit of enemy advance 

line of sight 

listening post 

line of oearing 

mechanized 

meter 

magnetic 

major 

mobility corridor 

mobility, countermobility, and survivability 

modified combined obstacles overlay 

mechanized 

medical evacuation 

mission essential task list 

mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time 

available 

Military Intelligence 

meaconmg, intrusion, jamming, and 

interference 

minute 

mission-oriented 

Military Police 

motorized rifle 

motorized rifle battalion 

motorized rifle company 

motorized rifle division 

motorized rifle platoon 

motorized rifle regiment 

main supply route 

a type Soviet equipment 

north 

named areas of interest 

North Atlantic Treaty Organization 

nuclear, biological, and chemical 

not earlier than 



protection posture 



Glossary-4 



FM 34-2-1 



NLT 
no 
NOD 
noncomm 

NV 

NVG 

OB 

obj 

O&I 

OMG 

OP 

OPCON 

OPFOR 

OPLAN 

OPORD 

OPSEC 



PIR 

PL 

pit 

MCS 

MI 

■OL 
poss 
POV 
prep 
prob 

R&S 

RAC 

RC 

REC 

recon 

REMBASS 

reconnaissance-- 



regt 
retrans 
RII 
RISTA 

Rkh 



not later than 

number 

night observation device 

noncommunications 

night vision 

night vision goggles 

order of battle 
objective 

operations and intelligence 
operational maneuver group 
observation post 
operational control 
opposing force 
operations plan 
operations order 
operations security 

priority intelligence requirements 

phase line 

platoon 

preventive maintenance checks and services 

preventive maintenance inspections 

petroleum, oils, and lubricants 

possible 

privately owned vehicle 

prepare 

probable 

reconnaissance and surveillance 

reconnaissance assault company 

Reserve Components 

radio electronic combat 

reconnaissance 

Remotely Monitored Battlefield Sensor System 

A mission undertaken to obtain, by visual 
observation or other detection methods, 
information about the activities and 
resources of an enemy or potential enemy; 
or to secure data concerning the 
meteorological, hydrographic, or geographic 
characteristics of a particular area. (DOD, 
NATO) 

regiment 

retransmission 

request for intelligence information 

reconnaissance, intelligence, surveillance 

and target acquisition 

a type of Soviet equipment 



Glossary-5 



FM 34-2-1 



Rkh/m 
RP 

s 

S2 

S3 

S3-air 

S-A 

SA 

SALT 

SALUTE 

SAM 

SCARF 

scty 

SEAL) 

SIGINT 

SIR 

SITMAP 

SMS 

SOI 

SOP 

SOR 

SP 

SSM 

Survl 

surveillance- 



TA 

TAA 

TACFIRE 

TAI 

TB 

TC 

TE 

temp 

TF 

tk 

TNT 

TOC 

TOT 

TOW 

TPL 

TR 



a type of Soviet equipment 
release point 

south 

Intelligence Officer (US Army) 

Operations and Training Officer (US Army) 

Air Operations and Training Officer (US Army) 

seismic-acoustic 

surface to air 

size, activity, location, and time 

size, activity, location, unit, time, 

equipment (spot report format) 

surface to air missile 

standard collection asset request format 

security 

suppression of enemy air defense 

signals intelligence 

specific information requirements 

situation map 

simultaneous monitoring system 

signal operation instructions 

standing operating procedure 

specific orders and requests 

start point 

surface-to-surface missile 

surveillance 
The systematic observation of aerospace, 

surface or subsurface areas, places, persons, 
or things by visual, aural, electronic, 
photographic, or other means. (DOD,NATO) 

theater army 

tactical air army 

tactical fire direction computer system 

target areas of interest 

tank battalion 

training circular 

tactical exploitation 

temperature 

task force 

tank 

trinitrotoluene 

tactical operations center 

time over target 

tube-launched, optically tracked, wire guided 

time phase line 

tank regiment 



Glossary-6 



FM 34-2-1 



TRADOC 

TTP 

UHF 

us 

USAF 

USAICS 

USSR 

VHF 
vie 

w 



United States Army Training and Doctrine 

Command 

tactics, techniques, and procedures 

ultra high frequency 

United States 

United States Air Force 

US Army Intelligence Center and School 

Union of Soviet Socialist Republics 

very high frequency 
vicinity 

west 



Glossary-7 



FM 34-2-1 

REFERENCES 

REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS 

Required publications are sources that users must read in 
order to understand or to comply with this field manual. 



Field Manuals (FMs) 

FM 17-98 
FM 34-1 

FM 34-2 
FM 34-3 
FM 34-10-1 



FM 34-80 

FM 34-130 

FM 101-5 

FM 101-5-1 

61 JTCG/ME-87-10 



Scout Platoon. October 1987. 
Intelligence and Electronic Warfare 

Operations. July 1987. 
Collection Management. 22 October 1990. 
Intelligence Analysis. 15 March 1990. 
Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the 

Remotely Monitored Battlefield Sensor 

Systems (REMBASS). November 1990. 
Brigade and Battalion Intelligence and 

Electronic Warfare Operations. 

April 1986. 
Intelligence Preparation of the 

Battlefield. May 1989. 
Staff Organization and Operations. 

May 1984. 
Operational Terms and Symbols. 

October 1985. 
Handbook for Operational Testing of 

Electro-Optical Systems in Battlefield 

Obscurants. October 1987. 



Department of the Army Pamphlet (DA Pam) 
DA Pam 381-3 
DD Form 1975 



How Latin America Insurgents Fight. 

June 1986. 
Joint Tactical Air Reconnaissance and 

Surveillance Request Form. 



Rand Study. Applying the National Training Center Experience: 
Tactical Reconnaissance. October 1987. 



References-1 



FM 34-2-1 

RELATED PUBLICATIONS 

Related publications are sources of additional information. 
They are not required in order to understand this publication. 

Field Manuals (FMs) 

FM 6-20-10 TTP for the Targeting Process, Mar 90 

FM 24-33 Communications Techniques: Electronic 

Counter-Countermeasures. 22 Mar 85 
FM 34-10 Division IEW Operations. November 1986. 

(U) FM 34-lOA Division Intelligence and Electronic 

Warfare Operations, Secret. 

December 1986. 
FM 100-5 Operations. May 1986. 

FM 101-5 Staff Organization and Preparation. 

May 1984. 

(U) DIA Study. Reconnaissance and Surveillance and Target 
x Acquisition in the USSR, Secret/NOFORN. June 1988. 



References-2 



FM 34-2-1 



INDEX 
AA See avenue of approach. 
ADA See air defense artillery. 



area 

R&S location of operations, 
1-8, 2-6, 2-33, and 3-3 



ADA officer. See air defense 
artillery officer. 

aerial fire support officer 
mission support, 3-19 

AI See area of interest. 

air AA 

enemy use of, 2-3 

air and armored cavalry 
squadron 

mission support, 3-19 

air defense artillery 

defensive area of interest 
for Div ADA, 2-12 

air defense artillery officer 
R&S asset, 3-5 
staff responsibility, 4-3 

air defense artillery platoon 
mission, 3-15 

air liaison officer 
coordination, 3-15 
JAAT coordination, 3-16 
See chapter 9. 
staff responsibility, 4-4 

all-source production section 
support to CM&D process, 1-3 

ALO See air liaison officer. 

antitank (AT) helicopter 
commanders information 
requirement , 2-4 

AO See area of operation. 



area of interest 

identification of, 2-8 
offensive and defensive, 2-12 

area of operation 

IPB process requirement, 2-8 

armor 

commanders information 
requirement, 2-4 

armored vehicle 

commanders information 
requirement , 2-4 

Army aviation 

digital interface mission 
support, 3-20 

mission, 3-15 

R&S asset, 3-5 

Army aviation support officer 
mission coordination, 3-20 

artillery 

commanders information 
requirement, 2-4 

ASPS See all-source production 
section. 

asset 

tasking assets, 1-2, 1-4 

assets and equipment 

support to R&S plans, 3-1 

attack helicopter battalion 
mission support, 3-20 

augment 

scout combat missions, 3-2 
See chapter 8. 



Index-1 



FM 34-2-1 



augmentation 
See chapter 8. 

augmented 

essential equipment, 3-3 
scout limitations, 3-2 

augmenting 

See chapter 8. 

avenue of approach 

R&S application, 2-13 
support to commanders needs, 

2-3 

terrain factor in support to 

R&S application, 2-13 

aviation officer 

staff responsibility, 4-4 



battle task 

development of, 1-5 
list of, 1-7 
platoon 1-8 and 1-9 

BAE See battlefield area 
evaluation. 

battlefield area evaluation 
component of, 2-8 

battle damage assessment 
in support of TAI, 2-25 

battlefield operating system 
part of DST process, 2-22 

BOS See battlefield operating 

system . 



CANE See chemical environment . 
CAS See close air support. 



CESO See communications- 
electronics staff officer. 

changing double column to a 
diamond formation 
LIC movement, 11-22 

checkpoint 

R&S overlay. 6-2 

chemical environment 

IIB Test in NBC environment, 
1-6 

chemical officer 
See chapter 10. 

chemical-engineer 
reconnaissance 
See chapter 10. 

CI see counterintelligence. 

CI team 

R&S coordination, 4-5 

civilian population 
LIC operations, 11-25 

close air support 
EW operations, 12-8 

CM&D See collection and 
dissemination. 

collection and dissemination 
support to R&S, 1-3 and 1-4 

collection asset 

tasking of, 1-6 and 2-20 

collection effort 

battalion forces level, 3-1 
requirements for information, 

2-8, 2-18, and 2-20 



Index-2 



FM 34-2-1 



collection management process 

R&S and the CM&D praocess, 
1-2, 1-3, and 1-4 

collection plan 

control of the collection 

requirement, 2-2 and 2-3 
phases to develop a, 1-3 
unit collection requirements, 

1-4 

column 

formation, 11-18 

combat 

category of patrol, 3-3 
mission to support R&S, 1-7, 

1-9, and 2-6 

combat patrol 
provides, 3-3 

communications-electronics 
staff officer 

Brigade operations interface, 
12-13 

concealment and cover 
R&S application, 2-13 

counterintelligence 
mission support, 3-17 
staff responsibility, 4-3 

counterreconnaissance 

CR efforts, 1-2 

CR operations used of NAI, 
1-6 (see NAI) 

TTP and CR, iv 

CR See counterreconnaissance. 

critical task 

supporting battle tasks, 1-7, 
1-8, and 1-9 

cueing 

R&S planning, 4-4 



data base 

IPB support for R&S planning, 
2-6 

day and night observation 
device 

unit capability, 3-4 

deceive 

LIC operations, 12-2 

decision point 

support relationship to, 2-25 

decision points or line 

part of the DST process, 2-22 

decision support template 
IPB product, 2-22 
staff responsibility, 4-4 

defensive and offensive areas 
of interest 

requirements for R&S 
planning, 2-12 

demonstration 

LIC threat, 11-1 

diamond formation 

insurgent movement, 11-18 

disseminating 
PIR, 2-5 
see chapter 5 

division 

organization support, 1-2, 
1-3, and 1-4 

division reconnaissance asset 
division, 10-4 

doctrinal template 
IPB product, 2-15 
product integration, 2-15 

double column 

insurgent movement, 11-22 



Index-3 



FM 34-2-1 



DST See decision support 
template. 



ECCM See electronic 
counter-countermeasures . 

ECM See electronic 
counter-measures . 

electronic counter-measures 
EW asset, 12-1 

electronic 

counter-countermeasures 
EW asset, 12-1 

electronic HPT 

EW planning, 12-5 

electronic support measures 
collection, 12-2 

electronic warfare 

CR battle planning and, 2-2 

electronic warfare collection 
system 

mission support, 3-17 

enemy order of battle 

data base requirement, 2-6 

enemy prisoner of war 
interrogator 
mission, 3-17 

enemy rates of advance 
See threat evaluation. 

enemy situation template 
IPB product, 1-4 

engineer 

augmentation support to R&S, 
2-25 



engineer and air defense 

artillery 

IPB product, 2-14 
mission support, 3-19 

engineer officer 

staff responsibility, 

4-3 

engineer platoon 
mission, 3-14 
R&S asset, 3-5 

engineer product 

IPB special product, 
2-6 

engineer section 
4-4 

engineer support officer 
3-14 

environmental effects for R&S 
see Figure 2-7 

EPW interrogator. See enemy 
prisoner of war interrogator. 

equipment 

R&S asset, 3-1 

ESM See electronic support 
measures. 

event analysis matrix 

IPB product for specific 
events, 2-22 

event template 

IPB product, 1-4 and 2-22 
process for, 2-20 

EW See electronic warfare. 



Index-4 



FM 34-2-1 



fan 

insurgent movement, 11-18 

fan formation 

insurgent movement, 
11-23 

FEBA See forward edge of the 
battle area. 

field artillery 

integration into R&S and CR 
plans, 3-12 

mission support, 3-18 

R&S asset, 3-5 

field of fire 

R&S application, 2-13 

fire support 

see fire support officer 
to R&S, 2-25 

fire support officer 
in R&S planning, 1-5 
JAAT coordination, 3-16 
R&S planning, 1-5 
staff coordination, 1-2 
staff responsibility, 4-3 

fire support team 

mission, 3-12 and 3-14 

FIST See fire support team. 

FLOT See forward line of own 
troops . 

FO See forward observers. 

forward edge of the battle area 
enemy movement to, 2-22 

forward line of own troops 
enemy distance from, 2-9 

forward observers 

mission, 3-12 and 3-14 



FRAGO See fragmentary order. 

fragmentary order 

method of tasking, 5-1 

FS0 See fire support officer. 



G2 

division, 3-18 
tasking, 1-4 

GSR See gruond surveillance 
radar. 

GSR and REMBASS 

mission support 3-17 

ground surveillance radar 
2 4 -hour coverage, 3-4 
mission, 3-5 
R&S asset, 3-5 

GUARDRAIL 

collection, 11-36 

guerrilla 

LIC threat, ll-l 

support requirements, 11-2 

guerrilla platoon 
mission, 11-6 

guerrilla training complex 
11-13 



helicopter 

LIC support, 11-37 

high payoff target 
developing , 2-2 
monitoring, 7-1 

high value target 

supporting the identification 
of HPT's, 2-25 



Index-5 



FM 34-2-1 



HPT See high payoff target. 
HVT See high value target. 



IEW See intelligence and 
electronic warfare. 

IEWSE See intelligence and 
electronic warfare support 
element. 

IEWSE officer 

staff responsibility, 4-3 

IIB Test See CANE. 

incident matrix 

overlay support, 11-29 
see figure 11-23 

incident overlay 

historical data, 11-25 

incursion 

operations, 11-3 

indicator 

effective R&S planning, 4-1 

infantry 
3-2 

infantry platoon 
8-4 

infiltration 

operations, 11-3 

insurgent 

conduct, 11-2 
LIC threat, 11-1 

intelligence acquisition task 
method of tasking, 5-3 

intelligence and electronic 
warfare 

system support to R&S, 1-2 



intelligence and electronic 
warfare support element 

coordination with R&S, 1-2 

mission, 3-16 



intelligence annex 
use of, 2-5 

intelligence cycle 

crucial phase in R&S, 2-2 

intelligence preparation of the 
battlefield 

R&S and IPB, 1-2 and 1-5 

intelligence requirement 

commanders needs, 1-3, (see 
PIR and R&S) 

intelligence summaries 

use of, 2-5 (see intelligence 
annex) 

intercept 

IEW asset, 12-3 

interrogation 

LIC support, 11-33 

IPB See intelligence 
preparation of the battlefield. 

IR See intelligence 
requirement. 



JAAT See Joint Air Attack 

Team. 

jam 

LIC operations, 12-3 

jammer 

brigade operations, 12-14 

Joint Air Attack Team 
0H-58D interface, 3-16 



Index-6 



FM 34-2-1 



key terrain 

R&S application, 2-13 



"L" formation 

insurgent movement, 11-18 

LIC See chapter 11. 

light infantry See chapter 10. 

limit of enemy advance 
identify, 10-11 

limits of responsibility 
in the R&S effort, 2-26 

listening post 
enemy, 2-4 

maneuver element, 3-4 
R&S asset, 3-1 

locate 

LIC operations, 12-3 

LOEA See limit of enemy 
advance . 

LP See listening post. 



matrix 

method, 6-2 

MCOO See modified combined 
obstacles overlay. 

mechanized infantry 
see chapter 10 

METT-T See mission, enemy, 
terrain, time, and troops 
available. 

military police platoon 
mission support, 3-20 

mission analysis 

AI determination, 2-9 



mission , enemy , terrain , time , 
and troops available 

unit responsibilities to R&S 
planning, 2-26 

modified combined obstacles 
overlay 

overlay, 5-3 

movement formation 

insurgent operations, 11-18 

MP See military police 
platoon. 

named areas of interest 

part of situation templating, 
2-20 

GSR task, 3-5 

use of 1-6 (see CR) 

NAI See named areas of 
interest. 

NBC See nuclear, biological, 
and chemical. 

NBC officer 

staff responsibility, 

night observation device 
equipment, 3-4 

night vision device 
3-9 

NOD See night observation 
device. 

nuclear, biological , and 
chemical 

environment, 1-6, 1-7, and 
1-8 



OB See order of battle. 

observation 

R&S application, 2-13 



Index-7 



FM 34-2-1 



observation equipment 
used by scouts, 3-3 

observation equipment 
associated with maneuver 
battalion 
3-7 

observation post 
enemy, 2-4 

maneuver element, 3-4 
scout operations, 3-2 

obstacle 

R&S application, 2-13 

obstacle analysis 
provided by, 3-14 

offensive operation 
see chapter 9 

OP See observation post. 

operations order See chapter 
5. 

operations plan 
5-1 

OPLAN See operations plan. 

OPORD See operations order. 

order of battle 
2-6 

overlay 

method, 6-2 



patrol 

maneuver element, 3-2 
R&S scout, 3-1 

PIR See priority intelligence 
requirement. 



population status overlay 
LIC support, 11-35 

priority intelligence 
requirement 

commanders needs, 1-3 (see IR 
and R&S) 



QUICKFIX 

R&S asset, 11-33 



R&S See reconnaissance and 
surveillance. 

R&S tasking See chapter 5. 

R&S limit of responsibility 
See Figure 2-15. 

R&S overlay 

dissemination of R&S, 1-2 
overlay, 6-1 

R&S tasking matrix See figure 
7-4. 

radio intercept 
R&S asset, 11-33 

raid 

mission, 11-15 

reconnaissance 
active, 2-1 
as a patrol, 3-2 
attack outcome and, 1-1 
TTP and, iv 

reconnaissance and surveillance 
develop solutions in R&S 

plans, 1-6 

importance of R&S, 1-1 

R&S and PIR and IR, 1-3 (see 

PIR and IR) 

(see scheme of maneuver, 1-5) 
solutions to common errors in 

planning, 1-4 



Index-8 



FM 34-2-1 



reconnaissance company See 
chapter 10. 

reconnaissance battalion 
acquisition See chapter 10. 

reconnaissance subsquad 
organization, 11-6 

redundancy 

R&S planning, 4-4 and 4-5 

regiment 

reconnaissance unit, 10-4 

REMBASS See remotely monitored 
battlefield sensor system. 

remotely monitored battlefield 
sensor system 
capabilities, 3-10 

R&S asset, 3-5 

teams and equipment, 3-11 and 
3-12 

release point 

R&S overlay, 6-2 

request for intelligence 
information 

information needs, 2-5 

retask 

R&S assets, 7-8 

RII See request for 
intelligence information. 

RP See release point. 

route 

task, 1-8 

type of patrol mission, 3-3 

route reconnaissance 
scout mission, 3-2 
scout task, 1-8 



S2 

role of S2 in planning of 
R&S, iv 

S2 coordination with S3 and 
FSO, 1-2 

52 unit role, 1-1 

S3 

JAAT coordination, 3-16 

53 coordination with S2 and 
FSO, 1-2 

S3 involvement with 
subordinate commands, 1-5 

S3-air 

JAAT coordination, 3-16 

sabotage 

operations, 11-3 
subsquads, 11-6 

scheme of maneuver 

formulation of R&S plan, 1-5 
(see R&S) 

scout 

R&S asset, 3-1 

scout platoon 

operations, 3-2 

platoon tasks, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7, 
and 1-8 

scouts with infantry 

mission requirements, 3-2 
See chapter 8. 

screening 

scout mission, 1-2 and 3-2 

security 

combat patrol capability, 3-3 
and 3-4 

patrol requirement, 3-3 

scout mission, 3-2 

scout platoon task, 1-7 and 
1-8 



Index-9 



FM 34-2-1 



sensor 

LP/OP 24-hour capability, 3-4 

seven BOS See chapter 9. 

single 

formation, 11-18 

single file or firing line 
formation 

insurgent movement, 11-20 

SIR. See specific information 
requirement. 

situation map 

insurgents, 11-29 

situation template 
IPB praoduct, 1-4 
product integration, 2-15 

soldier 

information asset, 1-9 and 
3-4 

SOR See specific orders and 
requests. 

SP See start point. 

special uses and effects of 
terrain 

for R&S planning, 2-3 

specific information 
requirement 

R&S planning, 4-1 and 10-11 

specific orders and request 
R&S planning, 4-1 

start point 

R&S overlay, 6-2 

subordinate unit instruction 
method of tasking, 5-1 

subsquad 

guerrilla units, 11-6 

Index-10 



surprise attack 
operations, 11-3 

surveillance 
passive, 2-1 

synchronization matrix 

part of the DST process, 2-22 

synchronization See 
synchronize. 

synchronize 

battlefield operating 
systems, 2-22 

R&S with battle, 2-6 

the R&S effort, 2-25 



tactical Air Force 
mission, 3-16 
R&S asset, 3-5 

TAI See target area of 
interest. 

target 

enemy, 2-14 

R&S planning, 1-4 

REMBASS identification of, 
3-10, 3-11, and 3-14 

target acquisition 

fire finder radar, 3-18 
R&S and CR product 

requirement, 2-15 

target acquisition asset 
3-16 

target acquisition data 
provided by GSR, 3-5 

target areas of interest 
interdicting sites, 2-25 
part of DST process, 2-22 

target identification 
3-9 



FM 34-2-1 



target list worksheet 
12-6 

target value analysis process 
to determine HVT's, 2-15 

target-acquisition 

FIST V capability, 3-14 
OH-58D capability, 3-15 
to determine HVT's, 2-15 

targeting 

part of a successful defense, 
1-1 

targeting data 

a collection requirement, 2-2 

targeting process 
2-23 

task organize 

increase scout capabilities, 
3-2 

task organized See chapter 8. 

task organizing 
R&S planning, 4-4 
See chapter 8 . 

tasking See chapter 5. 

tasking asset 

requirement, 7-8 

terrain 

analysis provided by, 3-14 
part of R&S planning, 1-3 and 

2-5 

terrain analysis 

component of IPB, 2-8 

terrorist act 

LIC threat, 11-1 

threat data base 
information for IPB, 2-14 



threat evaluation 

component of IPB, 2-8, 2-14, 
and 2-15 

threat integration 

component of IPB, 2-8 and 
2-15 

time phase line 

part of the DST process, 2-22 

TPL See time phase line. 

trap map 

insurgent, 11-29 

two-echelon formation 

insurgent movement, 11-18 



war gaming 

DST a product of, 2-25 

war gaming process 

the process of war gaming, 
2-25 

weather analysis 

component of IPB, 2-8 

weather 

required for R&S planning, 
1-3 and 2-5 

wedge formation 

insurgent movement, 1-18 



vegetation See chapter 2 . 



zone 

R&S patrol locations, 3-3 
scout R&S area coverage, 3-2 

zone reconnaissance 
scout mission, 3-2 
scout task, 1-8 



Index-11 



FM 34-2-1 
19 JUNE 1991 



By Order of the Secretary of the Army: 



CARL E. VUONO 
General, United States Army 
Chief of Staff 



Official: 



PATRICIA P. HICKERSON 
Colonel, United States Army 
The Adjutant General 



DISTRIBUTION : Active Army, USAR, and ARNG: To be distributed 
in accordance with DA Form 12-11E, requirements for FM 34-2-1, 
Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Reconnaissance and 
Surveillance and Intelligence Support to Counterreconnaissance 
(Qty rqr block no. 4873). 

*U.S. Government Printing Office 1994-300-421/82314